2015 Dodge Dart Owner's Manual

User Manual: 2015-dart

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 664 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Dart
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Dart
15PFD41-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Information Provided by:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-
portation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or op-
tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previ-
ously manufactured.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
Information Provided by:
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1INTRODUCTION .............................................................3
2THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE .............................9
3UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
4UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
5STARTINGANDOPERATING .................................................407
6WHATTODOINEMERGENCIES ..............................................525
7MAINTAININGYOURVEHICLE ...............................................563
8MAINTENANCESCHEDULES .................................................621
9IFYOUNEEDCONSUMERASSISTANCE ........................................629
10 INDEX ....................................................................639
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
!INTRODUCTION ........................4
!HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............4
!WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ..............6
!VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ........6
!VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ....7
1
Information Provided by:
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-
tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-
nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfac-
tion.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
4INTRODUCTION
Information Provided by:
1
INTRODUCTION 5
Information Provided by:
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against op-
erating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against proce-
dures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cau-
tions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
VIN Location
6INTRODUCTION
Information Provided by:
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
1
INTRODUCTION 7
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
!A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS .............12
▫Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped. .12
▫Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped . . .13
▫Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped . . .14
▫Key Fob — If Equipped ..................15
▫Ignition Or Accessory On Message ..........16
!SENTRY KEY® .........................17
▫Replacement Keys .....................18
▫Customer Key Programming ..............19
▫General Information ....................19
!
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .20
▫Rearming Of The System ................20
▫To Arm The System ....................20
▫To Disarm The System...................21
▫Tamper Alert .........................22
▫To Use The Panic Alarm .................22
▫Security System Manual Override ...........23
!ILLUMINATED ENTRY ...................23
!REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) ...........23
▫To Unlock The Doors ...................25
2
Information Provided by:
▫To Lock The Doors .....................25
▫To Unlatch The Trunk ...................26
▫Using The Panic Alarm ..................26
▫Programming Additional Transmitters .......27
▫Transmitter Battery Replacement ...........27
▫General Information ....................30
!
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . .30
▫How To Use Remote Start ................31
!DOOR LOCKS .........................34
▫Manual Door Locks ....................34
▫Power Door Locks .....................35
▫Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..........................37
!KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ .................38
!WINDOWS ...........................43
▫Power Windows .......................43
▫Wind Buffeting .......................47
!TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE .............47
!TRUNK SAFETY WARNING................48
▫Trunk Emergency Release ................48
!OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..........49
▫Important Safety Precautions ..............49
▫Seat Belt Systems ......................51
▫Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ........62
▫Child Restraints .......................88
▫Transporting Pets .....................109
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
!ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .109
!SAFETY TIPS .........................110
▫Transporting Passengers .................110
▫Exhaust Gas .........................111
▫Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .............................112
▫Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle .........................114
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
Information Provided by:
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or
keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system
consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip
in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The
keyless ignition system consists of a Key Fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a Keyless
Ignition Node (KIN).
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) — If Equipped
The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with
detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-
tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position
is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When
released from the START position, the switch automati-
cally returns to the ON/RUN position.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM)
1—OFF
2—ACC(ACCESSORY)
3—ON/RUN
4—START
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) — If Equipped
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition
switch with the push of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in the passenger
compartment.
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) has four operating
positions, three of which are labeled and will illuminate
when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and
ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start
RUN will illuminate.
NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
1—OFF
2—ACC(ACCESSORY)
3—ON/RUN
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
Information Provided by:
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
If your vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ feature, refer to “Starting Procedure” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Standard Blade Ignition Key — If Equipped
Your vehicle may use a standard blade key ignition
system. The authorized dealer that sold you your vehicle
has the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your
authorized dealer. Ask your authorized dealer for these
numbers and keep them in a safe place. You can insert the
double-sided standard blade key into the ignition switch
or lock cylinders with either side up.
Standard Blade Ignition Key
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Key Fob — If Equipped
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
You can keep the emergency key with you when valet
parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the face of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb and
then pull the key out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal (IGNM)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Information Provided by:
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition
to the chime, the ignition or accessory on message will
display in the cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is cycled to the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Emergency Key Removal (KIN)
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selec-
tor.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
SENTRY KEY®
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor-
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
Information Provided by:
The system uses a Key or Key Fob with Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter, an RF receiver, and either an
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) or a Keyless Ignition
Node (KIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-
ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compat-
ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Keys or Key Fobs that are programmed to
the vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. Once a Key or Key Fob is programmed to a
vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Always remove the keys from the vehicle and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho-
rized dealer, this procedure consists of programming a
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer sys-
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming Keys or Key Fobs with RKE transmitters
may be performed at an authorized dealer.
General Information
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Information Provided by:
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for unau-
thorized operation. This system may also incorporate a
ultrasonic intrusion sensor that monitors for motion in
the vehicle. If something triggers the alarm, the Vehicle
Security Alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the headlights, park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the Vehicle
Security Light in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn the horn
off after three minutes, turn all of the visual signals off
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to #Starting Procedures#in #Starting
And Operating#for further information).
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
•For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
•Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
•Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
same exterior zone (refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™#
in #Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle#for
further information).
•Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
the following methods:
•Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
•Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle if
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF
position.
•For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
push the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ START/STOP but-
ton (requires at least one valid Key Fob in the
vehicle).
•For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™, insert a valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
NOTE:
•The driver’s door key cylinder and the trunk button on
the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
•When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
vehicle; however, you can create conditions where the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
Information Provided by:
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-
ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
exterior lights will flash, the horn will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
exterior lights blink three times when you unlock the
doors. Check the vehicle for tampering.
To Use The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the Key Fob/Remote for at least
one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights will turn on, the park lights and turn signals
will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, and the interior
lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-
ther information.
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position from the OFF position.
NOTE:
•The front courtesy overhead console and door cour-
tesy lights will turn on if the dimmer control is in the
#Dome ON#position (extreme top position).
•The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from dis-
tances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmit-
ter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
(IGNM)
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Flash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Lock The Doors
Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit-
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Information Provided by:
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
To Unlatch The Trunk
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off,
and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
(24 km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
•The interior lights will turn off if you cycle the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the
Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights
and horn will remain on.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
•Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
•Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Emergency Key Removal
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
Information Provided by:
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal – if
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
seal during removal.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal Remove Screw From Transmitter Case
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
Separating Ignition Node Module (IGNM) Transmitter
Case
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter
Case
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
Information Provided by:
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as
shown in step #2 for removal.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Key Fob with Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the
engine conveniently from outside the vehicle
while still maintaining security. The system has
a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
•Low fuel indicator must not be illuminated.
•Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
•Shift lever in PARK
•Doors closed
•Hood closed
•Trunk closed
•Hazard switch off
•Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
•Battery at an acceptable charge level
•RKE panic button not pushed
•System not disabled from previous remote start event
•Vehicle security alarm not active
•Ignition in OFF position
WARNING!
•Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-
oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-
jury or death when inhaled.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
Remote Start Abort Message
The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID (if
equipped) if the vehicle fails to remote start or exits
remote start prematurely:
•Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
•Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
•Remote Start Aborted — Trunk Open
•Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
•Remote Start Disabled — Start To Reset
•Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
•Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
The EVIC/DID message stays active until the ignition is
cycled to the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five sec-
onds. The vehicle doors will lock, parking
lights will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute
cycle.
NOTE:
•If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the
vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
Remote Start mode.
•For security, power window and power sunroof op-
eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is
in the Remote Start mode.
•The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition must be cycled to the RUN position before
you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,
push and release the START/STOP button (vehicles
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) or insert the key
and turn it to the RUN position (vehicles not equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™).
NOTE: The message #Remote Start Active Push Start
Button#(vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
or #Remote Start Active Key to Run#(vehicles not
equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™) will display in the
EVIC/DID until you push the START button or turn the
key to the RUN position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Information Provided by:
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on each door
trim panel forward. To unlock the front doors, pull the
inside door handle to the first detent or rotate the door
lock button until the red indicator is visible. To unlock the
rear doors, rotate the door lock button until the red
indicator is visible.
If the door lock button is locked (no red indicator visible)
when you shut the door, the door will lock. Therefore,
make sure the Key Fob is not inside the vehicle before
closing the door.
Door Lock Knob
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Information Provided by:
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
If you push the power door lock switch while the key is
in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
locks will not operate. This prevents you from acciden-
tally locking the Key Fob in the vehicle. Removing the
key from the ignition or closing the door will allow the
locks to operate. If a door is open, and the ignition is in
the OFF or ACC position, a chime will sound as a
reminder to remove the Key Fob.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en-
abled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
3. The transmission is in PARK when the door is opened
(automatic transmission vehicles).
4. The clutch pedal is not pushed when the door is
opened (manual transmission vehicles).
5. Any door is opened.
6. The doors were not previously unlocked.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
To change the current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the emergency key or a small coin into
the lock and rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged (locked).
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Information Provided by:
NOTE: For emergency exit from the rear seats when the
Child-Protection Door Lock System is engaged, manually
rotate the door lock button to the unlocked position, roll
down the window, and open the door using the outside
door handle.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
•Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
•If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-
sponse time.
•If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door
goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock
and if equipped will arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver’s door handle, grab the front driver
door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.
The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the
door is unlocked.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Push” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Push”, refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front
passenger door handle to unlock all four doors automati-
cally. The interior door panel lock knob will raise when
the door is unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Push”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE
Transmitter In Vehicle
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Information Provided by:
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE
transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE
transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other
valid Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected out-
side the vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically
unlocks all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times
(on the third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive
Entry RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
NOTE: The vehicle will only unlock the doors when the
doors are locked using the door panel switch, a valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitter is detected inside the
vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter is
detected outside the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock
the doors when any of the following conditions are true:
•The doors are locked using the RKE transmitter.
•The doors are locked using the LOCK button on the
Passive Entry door handles.
•The doors are manually locked using the door lock
knobs.
•There is a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either Passive
Entry door handle.
•Three attempts are made to lock the doors using the
door panel switch and then close the doors.
To Enter The Trunk
With a valid Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 3 ft
(1.0 m) of the deck lid, push the button on the right side
of CHMSL, (Center High Mounted Stop Light) which is
located on the deck lid.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
trunk lid, the trunk lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmit-
ters is outside the vehicle and within 3 ft (1.0 m) of the
deck lid.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all
four doors.
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
Trunk Unlock Button
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Information Provided by:
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
•The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
is in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
Power Window Switches
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect®, the
power window switches will remain active for up to 10
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF position.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The time
is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-
Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
Driver One Touch Down
The driver door power window switch has an auto down
feature. Push the window switch to the second detent
and release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the Auto Down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
Front Windows Express Up And Down — If
Equipped
Express Down
Push the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go down automatically.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Manual Down
Push the switch for more than a half a second and release
when you want the window to stop.
Express Up
Lift the switch for less than a half a second and release.
The window will go up automatically.
Manual Up
Lift the switch for more than a half a second and release
when you want the window to stop.
NOTE:
•If the window runs into any obstacle during auto-
closure, it will reverse direction and then go back
down. Remove the obstacle and use the window
switch again to close the window.
•Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-
closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window
may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:
1. Make sure the door is fully closed.
2. Pull the window switch up to close the window
completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Information Provided by:
3. Push the window switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional two seconds
after the window is fully open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
rear passenger doors. To disable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button (setting it in
the DOWN position). To enable the window controls,
push and release the window lockout button again
(setting it in the UP position).
Window Lockout Switch
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-
roof opening to minimize the buffeting.
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
The trunk lid can be released from
inside the vehicle by pushing the
TRUNK RELEASE button located
on the instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the
button will operate.
The trunk lid can be released from outside the vehicle by
pushing the TRUNK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or by using
the external release switch located on the underside of
the decklid overhang. The release feature will function
only when the vehicle is in the unlock condition.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
Information Provided by:
With the ignition in the ON/RUN position, the Trunk
Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
will reappear once the trunk is closed.
With the ignition in the OFF position, the Trunk Open
symbol will display until the trunk is closed.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
TRUNK SAFETY WARNING
WARNING!
Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a trunk internal emergency release
lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism. In the
event of an individual being locked inside the trunk, the
trunk can be simply opened by pulling on the glow-in-
the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mecha-
nism.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
•Seat Belt Systems
•Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
•Child Restraints
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
Trunk Emergency Release
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
Information Provided by:
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly (Refer to #Child Restraints#) should
be secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. Older chil-
dren who do not use child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled
up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
Air Bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door and you could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under #If You Need Assistance.#
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with out-
board front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbelted,
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain
on until both outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
duration or until the respective seat belts are buckled.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Information Provided by:
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occu-
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and
visual notification.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-
rized dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
driver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-
der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
•In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
•Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
•Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
•A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
•A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-
nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
•A seat belt that is worn under your arm is danger-
ous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a colli-
sion.
(Continued)
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
•A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
Information Provided by:
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the
shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to
position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or
squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that serves you
best.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Information Provided by:
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,
and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the
shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down
to make sure that it is locked in position.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pushing or squeezing the release but-
ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull
downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is
locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-
pant, it must be removed.
Adjustable Anchorage
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
•Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Information Provided by:
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
equipped with Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR) which are used to secure a child restraint system.
For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
•ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so
as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you
will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary
to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section.
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
#click.#
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-
matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. The Automatic
Locking Mode is available on all passenger-seating posi-
tions with a combination lap/shoulder belt. Use the
Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is
installed in a seating position that has a seat belt with this
feature. Children 12 years old and under should always
be properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Information Provided by:
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
•The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-
ture or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
•Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
system components:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Air Bag Warning Light
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•Steering Wheel and Column
•Instrument Panel
•Knee Impact Bolsters
•Advanced Front Air Bags
•Supplemental Side Air Bags
•Supplemental Knee Air Bags
•Front and Side Impact Sensors
•Seat Belt Pretenioners
•Seat Belt Buckle Switch
•Seat Track Position Sensors
•Occupant Classification System
Advanced Front Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
the air bag covers.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1—DriverAndPassengerAdvancedFrontAirBags
2—SupplementalDriverAndPassengerKneeAirBags/Driver
And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors or other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
WARNING!
•No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
•Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
This vehicle is equipped with a right front passenger
Occupant Classification System (“OCS”) that is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output
appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
•No objects should be placed over or near the air
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
•Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Al-
ways wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-
sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-
vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Information Provided by:
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — Front
Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occu-
pant’s seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists of the
following:
•Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
•Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
located in the front passenger seat
•Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is located
underneath the front passenger seat. The Sensor is lo-
cated beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any
weight on the seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the front pas-
senger’s most probable classification. The OCM commu-
nicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may
reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag deployment based on occupant classification. In
order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is important
for the front passenger to be seated properly and prop-
erly wearing the seat belt.
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if
the OCS estimates that:
•The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very
light objects on it; or
•The front passenger seat is occupied by a small pas-
senger, including a child; or
•The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing
child restraint; or
•The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her
weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat Oc-
cupant Status
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power de-
ployment
Child, including a child in
a forward-facing child re-
straint or booster seat*
Reduced-power de-
ployment OR Full-
power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment
OR reduced-power de-
ployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power de-
ployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult,
allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front
passenger seat and never install a child restraint system,
including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front pas-
senger seat.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
•Children 12 years or younger should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on
the front passenger seat and where that weight is located.
The OCS communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to determine
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation
rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated properly
and properly wearing the seat belt. Properly seated
passengers are:
•Sitting upright
•Facing forward
•Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor
•Sitting with their back against the seatback and the
seatback in an upright position
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small adult,
occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS may reduce
the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be properly
positioned on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death. The OCS deter-
mines the most probable classification of the occupant
that it detects.
Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Information Provided by:
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
increased seated weight, which may result in an adjusted
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in
a collision. This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly.
Decreasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Increasing the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a full-power deploy-
ment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
•The front passenger’s weight is transferred to another
part of the vehicle (like the door, arm rest or instru-
ment panel).
•The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns
to face the rear of the vehicle.
•The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full upright
position.
•The front passenger carries or holds an object while
seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.)
•Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
•Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat
and center console.
•Accessories that may change the seated weight on the
front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger
seat.
•Anything that may decrease or increase the front
passenger’s seated weight.
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most probable
classification. If an occupant in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Information Provided by:
Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•If an occupant in the front passenger seat is seated
improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a collision.
•Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with
the seatback in an upright position, your back
against the seatback, sitting upright, facing for-
ward, in the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
•Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., backpacks,
boxes, etc.) while seated in the front passenger seat.
Holding an object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Placing an object on the floor under the front
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from working
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel
will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status. A malfunction in the OCS
may affect the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not come on, or
stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on as
you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS com-
ponents that may affect the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag inflation. In order for the OCS to properly
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Information Provided by:
classify the seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front passenger
seat components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the
seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any reason,
take the vehicle to your authorized dealer. Only Chrysler
Group LLC approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly followed:
•Do not modify the front passenger seat assembly or
components in any way.
•Do not use prior or future model year seat covers or
cushions not designated by Chrysler Group LLC for
the specific model being repaired. Always use the
correct seat cover and cushion specified for the vehicle.
•Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
•Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
•At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) component or SRS related component or fastener
be modified or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by Chrysler Group LLC.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the passenger seat assembly, its related components,
seat cover or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal collision. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
passenger if the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
(CMVSS).
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-
pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
•Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
•Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger Knee
Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental Driver
Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the
steering column and a Supplemental Passenger Knee Air
Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the glove
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags provide
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by working
together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and Advanced
Front Air Bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Your vehicle is equipped with two types of supplemental
Side Air Bags:
1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
Located in the outboard side of the front and rear (in
vehicles equipped with outboard rear seat SABs) seats.
The SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG ” label sewn into the outboard side of the
seats.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Information Provided by:
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury
during certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body
structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label Rear Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-
board side of the seatback’s trim cover (front seats) and
the seam on the outboard side of the seat cushion’s trim
cover (outboard rear seats — if equipped with rear SABs).
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into the
space between the occupant and the door. The SAB
moves at a very high speed and with such a high force
that it could injure you if you are not seated properly, or
if items are positioned in the area where the SAB inflates.
Children are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG.”
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Information Provided by:
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side impacts.
SABICs may reduce the risk of injuries in certain side
impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side win-
dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
headliner out of the way and covers the window. The
SABICs inflate with enough force to injure you if you are
not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain side impact events.
WARNING!
•Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-
dows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstruc-
tions.
•Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment
of the Side Air Bags in a particular impact event is
appropriate, based on the severity and type of collision.
The side impact sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side
of the vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact deploys the
right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a
good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Information Provided by:
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
•Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
•Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-
ment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
•Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to fric-
tion rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s in-
structions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
bags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-
diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
•Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
•After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
Information Provided by:
•Cut off fuel to the engine.
•Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
tion.
•Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition switch is
turned to the “OFF” position.
•Unlock the doors automatically.
System Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
changed from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition
OFF.
Air Bag Warning Light
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your protection
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Control-
ler (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with air bag
system electrical components.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the air bag
system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
for a self-check when the ignition switch is first turned to
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-
function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-
tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
•The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is
first turned to the ON/RUN position.
•The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
•The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Information Provided by:
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
•It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with dis-
abilities, contact your authorized dealer.
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
•How various systems in your vehicle were operating.
•Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened.
•How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelera-
tor and/or brake pedal.
•How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-
sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
Information Provided by:
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-
ecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resi-
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
•www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-
childsafety-index-53.htm
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convert-
ible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rear-
facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
Information Provided by:
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Larger Children Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the vehi-
cle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle. It
is recommended for children from birth until they reach the
weight or height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or forward-facing
in the vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have
outgrown their infant carrier but are still less than at least
two years old. Children should remain rear-facing until
they reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
•Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-
facing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
Information Provided by:
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
•Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
•After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attach-
ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-
ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
the vehicle seat?
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Information Provided by:
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Lower Anchors
Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH –
Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Information Provided by:
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH anchorage system once the com-
bined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint?
No Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower an-
chorages?
Yes You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 17 inches (440 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
Information Provided by:
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-
stall a child seat in the center position next
to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-
ages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
Can the head restraints be removed? Yes All head restraints may be removed.
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage sym-
bols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorage Locations
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
Information Provided by:
Locating The Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel be-
tween the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
Tether Strap Anchorages
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attach-
ments in the center seating position. Only install this type
of child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach-
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCH-
compatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-
Compatible Child Restraint System” for typical in-
stallation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-
facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraint systems will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH - Compatible Child Restraint:
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Information Provided by:
1.
Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the tether
strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach
the hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-
ing position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
•Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-
straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-
stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description un-
der “Occupant Restraints.”
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103
Information Provided by:
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child re-
straint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward
facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a for-
ward facing child restraint, up to
the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passen-
ger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passen-
ger seat and the child restraint is
allowed, if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be re-
moved?
Yes All head restraints may be re-
moved.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a
seating position with an ALR re-
tractor.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105
Information Provided by:
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
more room for the child seat.
2.
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child restraint.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the seat belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
“click”.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107
Information Provided by:
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether
anchorage for that seating position, move
the child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2.
Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible,
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
side of the head restraint.
1 — Cover A — Tether Strap Hook
3 — Attaching Strap B — Tether Anchor
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Tether Strap Mounting
108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
WARNING!
•An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
•If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109
Information Provided by:
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-
mental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to
“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-
hicle”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as a problem.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
•Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
(Continued)
110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
•Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
•If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
•If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111
Information Provided by:
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
not lit during starting, see your authorized
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoper-
able.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-
sonal injury.
•Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfer-
ing with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
•Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
•Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
(Continued)
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Ob-
jects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
•If required, mounting posts must be properly in-
stalled, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
!MIRRORS ............................121
▫Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .121
▫Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .122
▫Outside Mirrors ......................122
▫Outside Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped .........................123
▫Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped .................123
▫Power Mirrors .......................124
▫Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ...........124
▫Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . .125
!BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................125
▫Rear Cross Path.......................132
▫Modes Of Operation ...................133
▫General Information....................135
!Uconnect® PHONE (Uconnect® 200) .........135
▫Operation ...........................137
▫Phone Call Features ....................145
▫Uconnect® Phone Features ..............148
3
Information Provided by:
▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ............153
▫Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone .....................155
▫General Information ...................166
!Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N) .............167
▫Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav ..................167
▫Operation ..........................170
▫Phone Call Features ...................182
▫Uconnect® Phone Features ..............187
▫Advanced Phone Connectivity ............192
▫Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone .....................192
▫General Information ...................205
!VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect® 200) ........205
▫Voice Command System Operation .........205
▫Commands .........................207
▫Voice Training ........................211
!VOICE COMMAND ....................211
▫Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav .................211
▫Uconnect® Voice Commands .............213
!SEATS ..............................223
▫Power Seats — If Equipped ..............224
▫Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment .........................226
▫Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment ......227
▫Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped ...........................228
▫Front Heated Seats — If Equipped .........228
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫Head Restraints ......................230
▫Folding Rear Seat .....................232
!TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD .........234
!LIGHTS .............................236
▫Headlight Switch .....................236
▫Automatic Headlights — If Equipped .......237
▫Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............238
▫Headlight Time Delay ..................238
▫Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —
If Equipped .........................239
▫Daytime Running Lights (DRL) ...........240
▫Lights-On Reminder ...................240
▫Fog Lights — If Equipped ...............241
▫Multifunction Lever ...................242
▫Turn Signals .........................242
▫Lane Change Assist ...................243
▫High/Low Beam Switch ................243
▫Flash-To-Pass ........................243
▫Front Map/Reading Lights ..............243
▫Interior Lights .......................244
!WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ......246
▫Intermittent Wiper System ...............247
▫Wiper Operation ......................247
▫Mist Feature .........................248
▫Windshield Washers ...................248
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Information Provided by:
▫Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) .............249
▫Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ........249
!TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .251
!
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED . .252
!ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED .........................253
▫To Activate ..........................254
▫To Set A Desired Speed .................254
▫To Deactivate ........................255
▫To Resume Speed .....................255
▫To Vary The Speed Setting ...............255
▫To Accelerate For Passing ................257
!PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................258
▫ParkSense® Sensors ....................258
▫ParkSense® Warning Display .............258
▫ParkSense® Display ....................259
▫Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® ........266
▫Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System .............................266
▫Cleaning The ParkSense® System ..........268
▫ParkSense® System Usage Precautions.......268
!PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED ...........................271
!OVERHEAD CONSOLE ..................273
▫Front Map/Reading Lights ..............274
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
▫Sunglass Bin Door ....................274
!GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .275
▫Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .276
▫Programming A Rolling Code .............276
▫Programming A Non-Rolling Code .........278
▫Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ......280
▫Using HomeLink® ....................281
▫Security ............................281
▫Troubleshooting Tips ...................282
▫General Information....................283
!POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED ........284
▫Opening Sunroof — Express ..............285
▫Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode .........285
▫Closing Sunroof — Express...............285
▫Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode ..........285
▫Pinch Protect Feature ...................286
▫Pinch Protect Override ..................286
▫Venting Sunroof — Express ..............286
▫Sunshade Operation....................286
▫Wind Buffeting .......................286
▫Sunroof Maintenance ...................287
!ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................287
!CUPHOLDERS ........................291
▫Front Seat Cupholders ..................291
▫Rear Seat Cupholders ..................291
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
Information Provided by:
!STORAGE ............................292
▫Glove Compartment ...................292
▫Console Features .....................293
▫Door Storage.........................294
▫Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped . . . .295
!CARGO AREA FEATURES ................295
▫Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
Equipped ...........................295
▫Ski Pass-Through......................298
!REAR WINDOW FEATURES ..............298
▫Rear Window Defroster .................298
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-
shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced
by moving the small control under the mirror to the night
position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror
should be adjusted while the small control under the
mirror is set in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
Information Provided by:
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. This feature will be defaulted
on, and only be disabled when the vehicle is moving in
reverse.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have outside mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions: full
forward, full rearward and normal.
Outside Mirrors With Turn Signal And Approach
Lighting — If Equipped
Driver and passenger outside mirrors with turn signal
and puddle lamp contain three LEDs.
Two of the LED’s are used as turn signal indicators,
which flash with the corresponding turn signal lights in
the front and rear of the vehicle. Turning on the Hazard
Warning flashers will also activate these LEDs.
The third LED supplies illuminated entry lighting, which
turns on in both mirrors when you use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open any door. This
LED shines downward to illuminate the ground adjacent
to the Front and Rear Doors.
The Illuminated Entry lighting fades to off after about 30
seconds or it will fade to off immediately once the
ignition is placed into the RUN position.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The approach lighting will not function when the
shift lever is moved out of the PARK position.
Power Mirrors
The power mirror controls are located on the drivers door
trim panel.
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-
tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) button to select
the mirror that you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
Power Mirror Control
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on each sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light will turn on automati-
cally. Closing the mirror cover will turn off the light.
Sun Visor “Slide-On Rod” Feature — If Equipped
This feature allows for additional flexibility in position-
ing the visor to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pull the sun visor toward the inside rearview mirror to
extend it.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radar-
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
Information Provided by:
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
vehicle is stationary.
Rear Detection Zones
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone
length starts at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert
the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
•The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about
rapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de-
tection zones.
•The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
BSM Warning Light
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
Information Provided by:
contamination so that the BSM system can function
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bum-
per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
alert during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either
side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Rear Monitoring
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Information Provided by:
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
Overtaking/Approaching Overtaking/Passing
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
Stationary Objects Opposing Traffic
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicy-
clists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP Detection Zones
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before back-
ing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Modes Of Operation
Modes Of Operation With Uconnect® System — If
Equipped
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the
Uconnect® system screen. Refer to “Customer Program-
mable Features — Uconnect® Access settings ” in “Un-
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
Information Provided by:
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro-
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and de-
tected object are present on the same side at the same
time, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
be muted.
NOTE:
•Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
system, the radio volume is muted.
•If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
the appropriate visual alert only.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be no
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
systems.
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and
used.
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
General Information
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Uconnect® PHONE (Uconnect® 200)
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone using simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” $
“Mike” $“Work” or “Dial” $“248-555-1212”). Your
mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehi-
cle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute
your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile”,
Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect® website for
supported phones.
For Uconnect® phone compatibility - visit
Uconnect-
Phone.com or call 1–877–855–8400. Canadian Resi-
dents – UconnectPhone.com or call, 1-800-465–2001
(English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Information Provided by:
For additional information on Uconnect®:
•U.S. residents - visit
DriveUconnect.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
•Canadian Residents - visit
DriveUconnect.ca or call,
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to seven mobile phones to be linked to the
system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile phone can be
used with the system at a time. The system is available in
English, Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect® Phone Button
The steering wheel controls will contain the two
control buttons (Uconnect® Phone
button
and Voice Command button) that will
enable you to access the system. When you
push the Uconnect® Phone button you will hear a
BEEP. The beep is your signal to give a command.
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Voice Command Button
When you push the Voice Command
but-
ton you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your
signal to give a command.
The Uconnect® Phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth® mobile phone. See the
Uconnect® website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for
details.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the vehi-
cle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the Uconnect® Phone such as “Phone” or caller ID.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
•Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep.
•For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup”, “Device
Pairing” and then “Pair a Device”, the following
compound command can be said: “Setup”, “Device
Pairing” and “Pair a Bluetooth® Device”.
•For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
Information Provided by:
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice com-
mand “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect® Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep. The Uconnect® Phone will then play some of
the options.
To activate the Uconnect® Phone, simply push the
button and follow the audible prompts for direc-
tions. Uconnect® Phone sessions begin with a push of
the button on the steering wheel.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say #Cancel#and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If other phones are present during the pairing
process make sure they are switched to off or the
bluetooth is disabled before proceeding.
The following are general phone to Uconnect® Phone
pairing instructions:
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
•When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
and follow the audible prompts.
•For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the Uconnect® Phone a name for your mobile
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
•You will then be asked “Should paired device be set as
Favorite?” If yes this phone will become the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven mobile phones to
your Uconnect® Phone. However, at any given time,
only one mobile phone can be in use, connected to
your Uconnect® System. The priority allows the
Uconnect® Phone to know which mobile phone to use
if multiple mobile phones are in the vehicle at the same
time.
•Start paring procedure on device. See device manual
for instructions.
•Select Uconnect® on the device and enter the four-
digit Personal Identification Number (PIN) displayed
on radio into your mobile phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Information Provided by:
Dial By Saying A Number
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Dial.”
•The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
•For example, you can say “234-567-8901.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.”
•The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “john doe” or “john doe, mobile,” where
John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the
Uconnect® phonebook or downloaded phonebook. To
learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer to
“Add Names to Your Uconnect® Phonebook,” in the
phonebook.
•The Uconnect® system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Phonebook Download — Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect® website for supported phones.
•To call a name from the Uconnect® Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
by Saying a Name” section.
•Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect® Phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
•A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
•Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone-
book. However, if there is less than 10 contacts in the
mobile phone, the SIM contacts may also download.
•This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
Information Provided by:
Add Names To Your Uconnect® Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect® Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
To add names to the Uconnect® phonebook using Voice
Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry.”
3. When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use
of long names helps the Voice Command and it is
recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or
“Robert” instead of “Bob.”
4. When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
“Home,” “Work,” “Mobile,” or “Other”). This will
allow you to store multiple numbers for each phone-
book entry, if desired.
5. When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
The Uconnect® Phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect® Phone automati-
cally downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Edit Uconnect® Phonebook Entries
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion. Automatic down-
loaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Edit.”
•You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
•When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
“Phonebook Edit” can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit”
feature.
Delete Uconnect® Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
To delete a Uconnect® phonebook entry using Voice
Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook Delete.”
3. After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
Information Provided by:
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, push the Voice Command
button
while the Uconnect® Phone is playing the desired
entry and say “Delete.”
4. After you enter the name, the Uconnect® Phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
•Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
NOTE: Automatic downloaded phonebook entries can-
not be deleted or edited.
List All Uconnect® Phonebook Names
To list all Uconnect phonebook names using Voice Com-
mand:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook List Names.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded
phonebook entries, if available.
3. To call one of the names in the list, push the Voice
Command
button during the playing of the
desired name, and say “Call.”
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
operations at this point.
4. The Uconnect® Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
5. The selected number will be dialed.
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect® Phone. Check with your
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, you will
have the option of Answer, Ignore, or Transfer. The cursor
will begin on Answer. Rotating the scroll knob will move
between the options, pushing Enter will select the current
item. After accepting the call, the options on the screen
will be End, Transfer, Hold, and Mute. The top line will
display the contact, if the contact is not in the phonebook
or the phonebook has not been downloaded the phone
number will be displayed on the screen. Push the Phone
button to accept the call. To reject the call, push and
hold the Phone button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone.
•Push the Phone
button to place the current call on
hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Information Provided by:
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Dial” or
“Call” followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold
while the second call is in progress. To go back to the
first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls” in this
section. To combine two calls, refer to “Conference
Call” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, push the Phone
button until
you hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on
hold. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold
the Phone button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
push the Phone
button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two
calls have switched. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold):
1. Push and hold the Phone
button until you hear a
double beep, indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, push the Voice Command
button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under “Making a
Second Call While Current Call is in Progress.” After
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
the second call has established, push and hold the
Phone button until you hear a double beep, indi-
cating that the two calls have been joined into one
conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress:
1. Momentarily push the Phone
button.
•Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If
the active call is terminated by the phone far end, a
call on hold may not become active automatically.
This is cell phone-dependent.
2. To bring the call back from hold, push and hold the
Phone
button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
To redial the last number called from your mobile phone
using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Redial.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
Uconnect® Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
Information Provided by:
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail-
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
•After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cancellation of the call on the Uconnect® Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
•After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect® Phone for a certain dura-
tion, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the Uconnect® Phone to the mobile phone.
Uconnect® Phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the Uconnect® Phone is
using:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
3. Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every Uconnect® Phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phone-
book is usable. The paired phone name is not language-
specific and is usable across all languages.
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will instruct
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
•The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.,
Canada, and Mexico). The number dialed may not be
applicable with the available mobile service and area.
•If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, push the
button and say
“Setup,” followed by “Emergency.”
•The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as com-
pared to using the mobile phone directly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
To use your Uconnect® Phone System in an emer-
gency, your mobile phone must be:
•turned on,
•paired to the Uconnect® System,
•and have network coverage.
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Roadside Assistance.”
NOTE:
•
The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-521-2779
for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for Mexico City and
1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico).
Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC 24-Hour “Road-
side Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet and in the Owner’s Information Manual
on the DVD under “Other References.”
•If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, push the Phone
button
and say “Setup,” followed by “Roadside Assis-
tance.”
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to #Working with Automated
Systems.#Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the Uconnect® Phone.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to #Working
with Automated Systems.#
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can push the Voice
Command
button and say the sequence you wish
to enter, followed by the word “Send”. For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3
7 4 6 #), you can push the Voice Command button
and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”. Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by “Send”, is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a number
on a pager.
You can also send stored Uconnect® phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then push the Voice Command
button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to say the
“number.” If you wish to send the name say “Send
Name” followed by a valid name from the phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry,
as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
could push the Voice Command
button and say,
“Pair a Phone” to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect® Phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
•“Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
•“Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect® Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect® Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth® mobile
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone:
•Push the Voice Command
button.
•Following the beep, say “Mute.”
To un-mute the Uconnect® Phone:
•Push the Voice Command
button.
•Following the beep, say “Mute off.”
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Information Provided by:
To transfer an ongoing call from your Uconnect® Phone
paired mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone or vice
versa using Voice Command:
1. Push the Voice Command
button and say
“Transfer Call.”
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between your mobile phone and the
Uconnect® Phone System, follow the instructions de-
scribed in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•When prompted, say “List Phones.”
•The Uconnect® Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, push the Voice Command
but-
ton and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “Select” or
“Delete” a paired phone.
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Select Another Mobile Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the Uconnect® Phone.
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
•You can also push the Phone
button at any time
while the list is being played, and then choose the
phone that you wish to select.
•The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
Uconnect® Phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft. [9 m]) the vehicle.
Delete Uconnect® Phone Paired Mobile Phones
•Push the Phone
button to begin.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
•At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the
prompts.
•You can also push the Voice Command
button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Uconnect® Phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, push the
Phone
button and say “Uconnect® Tutorial.”
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Information Provided by:
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recogniz-
ing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect®
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
•From outside the Uconnect® Phone mode (e.g., from
radio mode), push and hold the Voice Command
button for five seconds until the session begins,
or,
•Push the Voice Command
button and say the
“Voice Training,” “System Training,” or “Start Voice
Training” command.
You can either push the Uconnect® Phone button to restore
the factory setting or repeat the words and phrases when
prompted by the Uconnect® Phone. For best results, the
Voice Training session should be completed when the
vehicle is parked with the engine running, all windows
closed, and the blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
To Reset all settings using Voice Command:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup,” then “Reset.”
•This will delete all phone pairing, phone book en-
tries, and other settings in all language modes. The
System will prompt you before resetting to factory
settings.
Voice Command
Uconnect® Voice Command Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the Voice Command features,
push the Voice Command
button and say “Voice
Command Tutorial.”
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
For best performance:
•Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½inch (1
cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
•Always wait for the beep before speaking.
•Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
Performance is maximized under:
•Low-To-Medium Blower Setting.
•Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed.
•Low Road Noise.
•Smooth Road Surface.
•Fully Closed Windows.
•Dry Weather Condition.
Even though the system is designed for users speaking in
North American English, French, and Spanish accents,
the system may not always work for some. When navi-
gating through an automated system such as voice mail,
or when sending a page, at the end of speaking the digit
string, make sure to say “Send.”
NOTE:
•Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is in
motion is not recommended.
•It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
in the Uconnect® Phonebook.
Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect® Phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are
not similar. Numbers must be spoken in single digits.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
Information Provided by:
“800” must be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hun-
dred.” You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number com-
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
•Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
•Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
•Low Road Noise
•Smooth Road Surface
•Fully Closed Windows
•Dry Weather Conditions
•Operation From The Driver’s Seat
•Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the Uconnect® Phone
•Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
Information Provided by:
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
Information Provided by:
Voice Commands
Primary Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Primary Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Primary Alternate (s)
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing pairing
phonebook phone book
previous
record again
Primary Alternate (s)
redial
return to main menu return or main menu
select phone select
send
set up phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect® Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Information Provided by:
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone and your phone is sup-
ported, an announcement will be made to notify you that
you have a new text message. If you wish to hear the new
message:
•Push the Phone
button.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
•Uconnect® Phone will play the new text message for
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect® Phone.
Send Messages:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone, if your
mobile phone is supported. To send a new message:
•Push the Phone
button.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
•You can either say the message you wish to send or say
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
To send a message, push the Voice Command
but-
ton while the system is listing the message and say
“Send.”
Uconnect® Phone will prompt you to say the name or
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes
2. No
3. Where are you?
4. I need more direction.
5. L O L
6. Why
7. I love you
8. Call me
9. Call me later
10. Thanks
11. See You in 15 minutes
12. I am on my way
13. I’ll be late
14. Are you there yet?
15. Where are we meeting?
16. Can this wait?
17. Bye for now
18. When can we meet
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Information Provided by:
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop
the system from announcing the new incoming mes-
sages.
•Push the Phone
button.
•After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth® ON mode.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® PHONE (8.4/8.4N)
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4Nav
Uconnect® Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-
vehicle communications system. Uconnect® Phone al-
lows you to dial a phone number with your mobile
phone.
Uconnect® Phone supports the following features:
Voice Activated Features:
•Hands Free dialing via Voice (“Call John Smith Mo-
bile” or, “Dial 248 555 1212”).
•Hands Free text to speech listening of your incoming
SMS messages.
•Hands Free text messaging (“Send a message to John
Smith Mobile”).
•Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
•Calling Back the last incoming call number (“Call
Back”).
•View Call logs on screen (“Show incoming calls,”
“Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed Calls,” “Show
Recent Calls”).
•Searching Contacts phone number (“Search for John
Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
•Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
•Viewing and Calling contacts from Phonebooks dis-
played on the touchscreen.
•Setting Favorite Contact Phone numbers so they are
easily accessible on the Main Phone screen.
•Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent Call logs.
•Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Information Provided by:
•Sending a text message via the touchscreen.
•Listen to Music on your Bluetooth® Device via the
touchscreen.
•Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for easy access
to connect to them quickly.
NOTE: Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted through your
vehicles audio system; the system will automatically
mute your radio when using the Uconnect® Phone. For
Uconnect® customer support, visit the following web-
site:
•U.S. residents - visit
UconnectPhone.com or call
1-877-855-8400.
•Canadian residents - visit
UconnectPhone.com or call
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Uconnect® Phone allows you to transfer calls between
the system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit
your vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s
microphone for private conversation.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in an accident
causing serious injury or death.
The Uconnect® Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect® features Bluetooth® technology - the global
standard that enables different electronic devices to con-
nect to each other without wires or a docking station, so
Uconnect® Phone works no matter where you stow your
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
mobile phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to
the vehicle’s Uconnect® Phone. The Uconnect® Phone
allows up to ten mobile phones or audio devices to be
linked to the system. Only one linked (or paired) mobile
phone and one audio device can be used with the system
at a time. The system is available in English, Spanish, or
French languages.
Uconnect® Phone Button
The Uconnect® Phone
button is used to
enter the phone mode and make calls, show
recent, incoming, outgoing calls, view
phonebook etc., When you push the button
you will hear a BEEP. The beep is your signal to give
a command.
Uconnect® Voice Command Button
The Uconnect® Voice Command
button
is only used for “barge in” and when you are
already in a call and you want to send Tones
or make another call.
The Voice Command
button is also used to access
the Voice Commands for the Uconnect® Voice Com-
mand features if your vehicle is equipped. Please see
the Uconnect® Voice Command section for direction
on how to use the Voice Command button.
The Uconnect® Phone is fully integrated with the ve-
hicles audio system. The volume of the Uconnect® Phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
Information Provided by:
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect®
Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect® Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
Uconnect® Phone prompts. There are two general meth-
ods for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
2. Say the individual commands and allow the system to
guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command and then
guided through the available options.
•Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Listen” prompt or another
prompt.
•For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Call” and then
“John Smith” and then “mobile”, the following com-
pound command can be said: “Call John Smith mo-
bile.”
•For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound command form of the voice command is
given. You can also break the commands into parts and
say each part of the command when you are asked for
it. For example, you can use the compound command
form voice command “Search for John Smith,” or you
can break the compound command form into two
voice commands: “Search Contact” and when asked
“John Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect® Phone
works best when you talk in a normal conversational
tone, as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect® Phone Voice system uses a Natural
Language Voice Recognition (VR) engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak commands in
phrases or complete sentences. The system filters out
certain non-word utterances and sounds such as “ah”
and “eh.” The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same phrase
or sentence such as “make a phone call” and “to Kelly
Smith.” For multiple inputs in the same phrase or sen-
tence, the system identifies the topic or context and
provides the associated follow-up prompt such as “Who
do you want to call?” in the case where a phone call was
requested but the specific name was not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the system
requires more information from the user it will ask a
question to which the user can respond without pushing
the “Voice Command”
button on your steering
wheel.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
the beep.
To activate the Uconnect® Phone from idle, simply push
the Phone
button on your steering wheel and say a
command or say “help.” All Uconnect® Phone ses-
sions begin with a push of the Phone button on the
radio control head.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Information Provided by:
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu.
You can also push the Phone
or Voice Command
button on your steering wheel when the system is
listening for a command and be returned to the main
or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect® Phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
NOTE:
•You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your mobile
phone to complete this procedure.
•The vehicle must be in PARK.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to refer-
ence your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The
Uconnect® website may also provide detailed instruc-
tions for pairing.
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. If there is no phone currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process. Then, search
for available devices on your Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. When prompted on the phone, enter
the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
•If “No” is selected, press the “Settings” button from
the Uconnect® Phone main screen.
•Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
•Search for available devices on your Bluetooth®
enabled mobile phone. When prompted on the
phone, enter the name and PIN shown on the
Uconnect® screen.
•See step 4 to complete the process.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in progress screen
while the system is connecting.
Mobile Phone Pairing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Information Provided by:
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the “Settings” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
3. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en-
abled mobile phone. When prompted on the phone,
enter the name and PIN shown on the Uconnect®
screen.
4. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite phone. Selecting “Yes” will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within range.
Mobile Phone Pairing Progress
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest phone paired will have the higher
priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to bring up
the Paired Phone screen from any screen on the radio:
•“Show Paired Phones”
•“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the “Player” button on the touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3. Press the “Bluetooth®” button on the touchscreen to
display the Paired Audio Devices screen.
4. Press the “Add Device” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: If there is no device currently connected with the
system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Bluetooth® en-
abled audio device. When prompted on the device,
enter the PIN shown on the Uconnect® screen.
6. Uconnect® Phone will display an in process screen
while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully completed,
the system will prompt you to choose whether or not
this is your favorite device. Selecting “Yes” will make
this device the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices within range.
NOTE: For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in which it was
paired. The latest device paired will have the higher
priority.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Information Provided by:
You can also use the following VR command to bring up
a list of paired audio devices:
•“Show Paired Phones”
•“Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect® Phone will automatically connect to the high-
est priority paired phone and/or Audio Device within
range. If you need to choose a particular phone or Audio
Device follow these steps:
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Sources”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the particular
Audio Device.
4. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the “Disconnect Device” button on the touch-
screen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Pair Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name for a different Phone or Audio Device
than the currently connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the “Delete Device” button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Paired Phones” or “Paired Audio Devices”
button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the settings icon button located to the right of the
device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5.
Press the “Make Favorite” button on the touchscreen;
you will see the chosen device move to the top of the list.
6. Press the “X” to exit out of the Settings screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect® Phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with Phone
Book Access Profile may support this feature. See
Uconnect® website,
UconnectPhone.com, for sup-
ported phones.
•To call a name from a downloaded mobile phone book,
follow the procedure in the Voice Recognition Quick
Reference section.
•Automatic download and update of a phone book, if
supported, begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect® Phone, for
example, after you start the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
Information Provided by:
•A maximum of 2,000 entries per phone will be down-
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the Uconnect® Phone.
•Depending on the maximum number of entries down-
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail-
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is avail-
able for use.
•Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
phone is accessible.
•This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the Uconnect® Phone. These can only be
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are trans-
ferred and updated to Uconnect® Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorite Phonebook
There are three ways you can add an entry to your
Favorite Phonebook.
1. During an active call of a number to make a favorite,
press and hold a favorite button on the top of the
phone main screen.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select Phone-
book from the Phone main screen, then select the
appropriate number. Press the “+” next to the selected
number to display the options pop-up. In the pop-up
select “Add to Favorites.”
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
3. From the Phone main screen, select Phonebook. From
the Phonebook screen, select the “Favorites” button on
the touchscreen and then select the “+” button on the
touchscreen located to the right of the phonebook
record. Select an empty entry and press the “+” on that
selected entry. When the Options pop-up appears,
press “Add from Mobile.” You will then be asked
which contact and number to choose from your mo-
bile phonebook. When complete the new favorite will
be shown.
Phonebook Favorites
Add From Mobile
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
Information Provided by:
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select phonebook from the
Phone main screen.
2. Next select Favorites on the left side of the screen and
then press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the “+” next to the Favorite you would like to
remove.
4. The Options pop-up will display, press “Remove from
Favs.”
Remove From Favorites
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Emergency And Towing Assistance
The Emergency and Towing Assistance Favorite numbers
can only be altered. These cannot be deleted and the
names cannot be changed.
To change the Emergency or Towing Assistance numbers
follow these steps.
1. Press the “Phonebook” button from the Phone main
screen.
2. Press the “Favorites” button on the touchscreen. Scroll
to the bottom of the list to locate the Emergency and
Towing Assistance Favorites.
3. Press the “+” Options button on the touchscreen.
4. Press the “+” next to appropriate Favorite that is to be
altered.
5. The Options pop-up will appear and you can choose
between Editing the number or resetting the number
to default.
Emergency And Breakdown Assistance
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
Information Provided by:
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone if the feature(s) are available and
supported by Bluetooth® on your mobile service plan.
For example, if your mobile service plan provides three-
way calling, this feature can be accessed through the
Uconnect® Phone. Check with your mobile service pro-
vider for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a phone call
with Uconnect® Phone.
•Redial
•Dial by pressing in the number
•Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name, Call by
Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or Call Back)
•Favorites
•Mobile Phonebook
•Recent Call Log
•SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the Phone
button to begin,
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial 151 1234 5555,”
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number 151-
1234-5555.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the Phone
button on your steering wheel to
begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. The Uconnect® Phone will dial the number associated
with John Doe, or if there are multiple numbers it will
ask which number you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the following call
features:
•Answer
•End
•Ignore
•Hold/unhold
•Mute/unmute
•Transfer the call to/from the phone
•Swap two active calls
•Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “Dial” button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touchscreens to
enter the number and press “Call.”
To send a touch-tone using Voice Recognition (VR), push
the “VR”
button on your steering wheel while in
a call and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is stored
in your mobile phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
Information Provided by:
Recent Calls
You may browse up to 34 of the most recent of each of the
following call types:
•Incoming Calls
•Outgoing Calls
•Missed Calls
•All Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the “recent calls”
button on the touchscreen on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my incoming calls” from any screen and the Incoming
calls will be displayed.
You can also push the Phone
button and say “Show
my recent calls” from any screen and the All calls
screen will be displayed.
NOTE: Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent” or “Missed.”
Recent Calls
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
Uconnect® Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio sys-
tem. Push the “Phone”
button on the steering wheel
to accept the call. You can also press the “answer”
button on the touchscreen or press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
mobile phone. Push the “Phone”
button on the
steering wheel, or press the “answer” button on the
touchscreen, or caller ID box, to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The Uconnect® Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the “Hold”
button on the Phone main screen, then dial a number
from the dialpad, recent calls, SMS Inbox or from the
phonebooks. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
to “Join Calls” in this section.
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the “Hold” button on the
Phone main screen.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
Information Provided by:
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the “Swap” button on the Phone main screen. Only
one call can be placed on hold at a time.
You can also push the “Phone”
button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the “Join Calls” button on the Phone main
screen to combine all calls into a Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily push the “Phone”
button or press the “end” button on the touch-
screen. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the “Redial” button on the touchscreen, or push the
“Phone” button
and after the “Listening” prompt
and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect® Phone will call the last number that was
dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
Uconnect® Phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF.
NOTE: The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range for the
Bluetooth® connection. It is recommended to press the
“transfer” button on the touchscreen when leaving the
vehicle.
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® Phone Features
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
•Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect® Phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Dial Emergency” and the Uconnect® Phone will
instruct the paired mobile phone to call the emergency
number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada,
and Mexico.
NOTE:
•The Emergency call may also be initiated by using the
touchscreen.
•
The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may not
be applicable with the available mobile service and area.
•The Uconnect® Phone does slightly lower your
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
for the mobile phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and connected to the
Uconnect® Phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the mobile phone has
network coverage and stays connected to the
Uconnect® Phone.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Information Provided by:
Roadside Assistance/Towing Assistance
If you need roadside/towing assistance:
1. Push the Phone
button to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Roadside Assistance” or say “Towing Assis-
tance.”
NOTE: The roadside/towing assistance number dialed is
based on the country where the vehicle is purchased
(1-800-521-2779 for the U.S./Canada, 55-14-3454 for
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the Chrysler Group LLC
24-Hour “Roadside Assistance” coverage details in the
Warranty Information Booklet and in the Owner’s Infor-
mation Manual on the DVD under “Other References.”
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
with Automated Systems.”
Working With Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to push numbers on the mobile phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your Uconnect® Phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services re-
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect® Phone.
When calling a number with your Uconnect® Phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can utilize the
touchscreen or push the Voice Command
button
and say the word “Send” then the sequence you wish
to enter. For example, if required to enter your PIN
followed with a pound, (3746#),youcanpush the
Voice Command button and say, “Send3746#.”
Saying “Send” followed by a number, or sequence of
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
numbers, is also to be used for navigating through an
automated customer service center menu structure,
and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored mobile phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. For example, if you previously created a Phone-
book entry with First and/or Last Name as “Voicemail
Password”, then if you push the Voice Command
button and say “Send Voicemail Password” the
Uconnect® Phone will then send the corresponding
phone number associated with the phonebook entry,
as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
•The first number encountered for that contact will be
sent. All other numbers entered for that contact will be
ignored.
•You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
network configurations. This is normal.
•Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
•Pauses, wait or other characters that are supported by
some phones are not supported over Bluetooth®.
These additional symbols will be ignored in the dialing
a numbered sequence.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
Information Provided by:
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
The Voice Command
button can be used when
you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “There are two numbers with the name John.
Say the full name” you could push the Voice Com-
mand button and say, “John Smith” to select that
option without having to listen to the rest of the voice
prompt.
Voice Response Length
It is possible for you to choose between Brief and
Detailed Voice Response Length.
1. Press the “More” button on the touchscreen (where
available), then press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen, then
scroll down to Voice Response Length.
3. Select either “Brief” or “Detailed” by pressing the box
next to the selection. A check-mark will appear to
indicate your selection.
Phone And Network Status Indicators
Uconnect® Phone will provide notification to inform you
of your phone and network status when you are attempt-
ing to make a phone call using Uconnect® Phone. The
status is given for network signal strength and phone
battery strength.
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
WARNING!
Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle
control, accident and injury. It is strongly recom-
mended that you use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take your focus off the
road or your hands off the steering wheel. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation of your
vehicle. We recommend against the use of any hand-
held device while driving, encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible and that you
become aware of applicable laws that may affect the
use of electronic devices while driving.
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
keypad and still use the Uconnect® Phone (while dialing
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your connected Bluetooth® mo-
bile phone, the audio will be played through your
vehicle’s audio system. The Uconnect® Phone will work
the same as if you dial the number using voice a
command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the Uconnect® Phone to play it on the vehicle
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situa-
tion, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel
that the call did not go through even though the call is in
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
audio.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Information Provided by:
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect® Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. To
mute the Uconnect® Phone simply press the “Mute”
button on the Phone main screen.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect® Phone allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect® Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the Uconnect®
Phone or vice versa, press the “Transfer” button on the
Phone main screen.
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth®
connection between a Uconnect® Phone paired mobile
phone and the Uconnect® Phone, follow the instructions
described in your mobile phone User’s Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect®
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
•Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least ½inch
(1 cm) gap between the overhead console (if equipped)
and the mirror.
•Always wait for the beep before speaking.
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
•Ensure that no one other than you is speaking during
a voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
•Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
•Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
•Low Road Noise
•Smooth Road Surface
•Fully Closed Windows
•Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many languages
and accents, the system may not always work for some.
When navigating through an automated system such as
voice mail, or when sending a page, before speaking the
digit string, make sure to say “Send.”
NOTE: It is recommended that you do not store names in
your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recognition rate
is optimized when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most number com-
binations is supported, some shortcut dialing number
combinations may not be supported.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
Information Provided by:
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
•Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
•Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
•Low Road Noise
•Smooth Road Surface
•Fully Closed Windows
•Dry Weather Conditions
•Operation From The Driver’s Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness to
a large degree rely on the phone and network, and not
the Uconnect® Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® Phone can read or send new messages on
your phone.
Your phone must support SMS over Bluetooth® to use
this feature. If the Uconnect® Phone determines your
phone is not compatible with SMS messaging over
Bluetooth® the “Messaging” button will be grayed out
and the feature will not be available for use.
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Uconnect® Phone SMS is only available when the
vehicle is not moving.
Read Messages:
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
connected to Uconnect® Phone, an announcement will
be made to notify you that you have a new text message.
Voice Text List
Voice Text Reply
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
Information Provided by:
Once a message is received and viewed or listened to,
you will have the following options:
•Send a Reply
•Forward
•Call
Send Messages Using Buttons On The Touchscreen:
You can send messages using Uconnect® Phone. To send
a new message:
1. Press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen.
2. Press the “messaging” button on the touchscreen then
“New Message.”
3. Press one of the 18 preset messages and the person
you wish to send the message to.
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
4. If multiple numbers are available for the contact select
which number you would like to have the message
sent.
5. Press “Send” or “Cancel.”
Send Messages Using Voice Commands:
1. Push the Phone
button.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the following beep,
say “Send message to John Smith mobile.”
3. After the system prompts you for what message you
want to send, say the message you wish to send or say
“List.” There are 18 preset messages.
While the list of defined messages are being read, you can
interrupt the system by pushing the Voice Command
button and saying the message you want to send.
Preset Message List
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
Information Provided by:
After the system confirms that you want to send your
message to John Smith, your message will be sent.
List of Preset Messages:
1. Yes.
2. No.
3. Okay.
4. I can’t talk right now.
5. Call me.
6. I’ll call you later.
7. I’m on my way.
8. Thanks.
9. I’ll be late.
10. I will be <number> minutes late.
Preset Message List
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
11. See you in <number> minutes.
12. Stuck in traffic.
13. Start without me.
14. Where are you?
15. Are you there yet?
16. I need directions.
17. I’m lost.
18. See you later.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect® Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be re-established by switching the mobile
phone OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least 15 seconds prior to using the system.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
Information Provided by:
Voice Tree
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
5. These commands can be used during a phone call after
pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button on
the steering wheel. Please note the call will be muted
while the VR session is active.
6. Send dial tones for automated systems is available
while a call is active. This is an example that uses a
Phonebook Record named “Voicemail Password.”
7. Storing Dial tones in contact names is possible but
only the first number encountered in a contact name
will be sent. For example if there is a number stored in
the Home and Work numbers for the contact “Voice-
mail password” only the Home number will be sent.
8. If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
commands will return a response that the contact does
not exist in the phonebook.
9.
Emergency and Towing assistance are contacts that have
been pre-loaded in the phonebook. Commands such as
“Call Emergency” and “Call Towing Assistance” will call
the corresponding number stored with those contacts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
Information Provided by:
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
1. You can replace “John Smith” with any name in your
mobile or favorite phone book. You can also say “Send
a message to John Smith” and the system will ask you
which phone number you want to send a message to
for John Smith.
2. You can replace “Mobile” with “Home,” “Work” or
“Other.”
3. You can replace “Incoming Calls” with “Outgoing
Calls” or “Missed Calls.”
4. Messaging commands only work if the Uconnect®
system is equipped with this feature and the mobile
phone supports messaging over Bluetooth®.
5. You can replace “248 555 1212” with any phone
number supported by your Mobile phone.
6. You can replace “4” with any message number shown
on the screen.
7. If your phone does not support phonebook download
or call log download over Bluetooth® then these
commands will return a response that the contact does
not exist in the phonebook.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
Information Provided by:
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and underlined in the gray shaded boxes.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
VOICE COMMAND (Uconnect® 200)
Voice Command System Operation
This Voice Command system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys-
tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
(Continued)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you push the Voice Command
button, you
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a
command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
To interrupt the system while it lists options, push the
Voice Command
button, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
Pushing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The
system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can
add or change commands. This will become helpful
once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, push the Voice Com-
mand
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Commands
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands, Universal commands and Local commands.
Universal commands are available at all times. Local
commands are available if the supported radio mode is
active.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to
the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
•“Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
•“Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
•“Sat” (to switch to Satellite radio mode)
•“Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
•“USB” (to switch to USB mode)
•“Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth®
Streaming mode)
•“Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
•“System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
Information Provided by:
Radio AM
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•“Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
•“Next Station” (to select the next station)
•“Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
•“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio.” In this mode, you may say the following com-
mands:
•“Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
•“Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
•“Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
•“List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
•“Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
•“Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Disc Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•“Track” (#) (to change the track)
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•“Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
USB Mode
To switch to USB mode, say “USB.” In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
•“Play” (to play an Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
Name, Track Name, etc.)
Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to Bluetooth® Streaming (BT) mode, say
“Bluetooth Streaming.” In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
•“Play” (to play the current track)
•“Pause” (to pause the current track)
•“Next Track” (to play the next track)
•“Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
Information Provided by:
Memo Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo.” In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording, you may push the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by say-
ing one of the following commands:
– “Save” (to save the memo)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
•“Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may push the Voice Com-
mand
button to stop playing memos. You pro-
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
– “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
Setup
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the
following:
•“Change to setup”
•“Switch to system setup”
•“Main menu setup”
•“Switch to setup”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
•“Language English”
•“Language French”
•“Language Spanish”
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•“Tutorial”
•“Voice Training”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to push the Voice
Command
button first and wait for the beep
before speaking the “Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog-
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect®
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
1. Push the Voice Command
button, say “System
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say
“Voice Training.” This will train your own voice to
the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect® Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be re-
peated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
VOICE COMMAND
Uconnect® 8.4/8.4 Nav
The Uconnect® Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, satellite
radio, disc player, USB/iPod® and SiriusXM
Travel Link.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Command
system as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Command system to recognize user voice
commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking
or a raised voice level.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your at-
tention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
When you push the Uconnect® Voice Command
button, you will hear a beep. The beep is your signal
to give a command.
If no command is spoken the system will say one of two
responses:
•I didn’t understand
•I didn’t get that, etc.
If a command is not spoken a second time, the system
will respond with an error and give some direction as
what can be said based on the context you are in. After
three consecutive failures of a spoken command the VR
session will end.
Pushing the Uconnect® Voice Command button
while the system is speaking is known as “barging in.”
The system will be interrupted, and after the beep, you
can say a command. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel” or
“Help.”
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the win-
dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
set to low.
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear available commands, push the Uconnect® Voice
Command button and say “Help.” You will hear
available commands for the screen displayed.
Uconnect® Voice Commands
The Uconnect® Voice Command system understands
two types of commands. Universal commands are avail-
able at all times. Local commands are available if the
supported radio mode is active.
Start a dialogue by pushing the Uconnect® Voice Com-
mand button.
Changing The Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pushing the Voice Command
button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com-
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
Starting Voice Recognition (VR) Session In
Radio/Player Modes
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
NOTE: The commands can be said on any screen when
a call is not active after pushing the Uconnect® Voice
Command button.
Source
To switch to the audio source, say “Change source to
Disc” for example. This command can be given in any
mode or screen:
•“Track” (#) (to change the track)
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
Information Provided by:
Voice Tree
214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•You can replace “950 AM” with any other AM or FM
frequency, such as “98.7 FM.”
•You can replace “80’s on 8” with any other satellite
station name received by the radio.
•You can replace “8” with any other satellite channel
number received by the radio.
•You can replace “rock” with any of the satellite music
types.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215
Information Provided by:
216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•You can replace the album, artist, song, genre, playlist,
podcast and audio book names with any correspond-
ing names on the current device that is playing.
•You can replace “8” with any track on the CD that is
currently playing. Command is only available when
CD is playing.
•Playlist, Podcast and audio book commands are only
available when the iPod® is connected and playing.
•VR commands, Albums, Artists, and Genre names are
based on the music metadata contained on the loaded/
connected device.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217
Information Provided by:
218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•You can replace “NFL” with any league shown on the
sports league screen. For example you can say “Show
MLB headlines” or “Show PGA headlines.”
•You can replace “Headlines” with any menu items
shown on a league screen. For example you can say
“Show NFL Schedule and results” or “Show NCAA
Basketball AP top 25” or “Show Major League Baseball
Teams.”
•You can also say “Show Current Weather” or “Show
extended weather” or “Show five day forecast” or
“Show ski info” to get other forecasts.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219
Information Provided by:
220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•Only available with Navigation equipped vehicles.
•You can replace “Player” with “Radio,” “Navigation,”
“Phone,” “Climate,” “More” or “Settings.”
•Navigation commands only work if equipped with
Navigation.
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221
Information Provided by:
222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•You can also say “Find City,” “Find Favorite,” “Find
Play by Category,” “Find Play by Name,” “Find Re-
cently Found,” “Where to?” or “Go Home.”
•You can say “Find Nearest” then “Restaurant,” “Fuel,”
“Transit,” “Lodging,” “Shopping,” “Bank,” “Entertain-
ment,” “Recreation,” “Attractions,” “Community,”
“Auto Services,” “Hospitals,” “Parking,” “Airport,”
“Police Stations,” “Fire Stations,” or “Auto Dealers.”
NOTE: Available Voice Commands are shown in bold
face and shaded grey.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
•Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
•Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223
Information Provided by:
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward or rearward.
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and rearward.
Push the seat recliner switch forward or rearward, the
seatback will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Switch
224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
may be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward or rearward to increase or
decrease the lumbar support. Push the switch upward or
downward to raise or lower the lumbar support.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225
Information Provided by:
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward Adjustment
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
Power Lumbar Switch
Front Seat Adjustment
226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
•Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
•Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Recline Lever
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227
Information Provided by:
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by
using a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat.
Pull upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
•Press the heated seat button
once to turn the High
setting ON.
•Press the heated seat button
a second time to turn
the Low setting ON.
•Press the heated seat button
a third time to turn
the heating elements OFF.
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will auto-
matically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 min-
utes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after ap-
proximately 45 minutes.
Seat Height Adjustment
228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
•Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-
ture of the seat.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229
Information Provided by:
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-
erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should
never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision.
Reactive Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Reactive Head Restraints (RHR). In the event of a rear
impact the RHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the RHR.
The RHRs will automatically return to their normal
position following a rear impact. If the RHRs do not
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the release
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either
of the head restraints require removal, see your autho-
rized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD
players. These items may interfere with the operation
of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a
collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Rear Head Restraints
The rear outboard head restraints have three positions
UP, MID and DOWN. The center head restraint has only
two positions, Up and Down. When the center seat is
being occupied the head restraint should be in the raised
position. When there are no occupants in the center seat
the head restraint can be lowered for maximum visibility
for the driver.
Release Button
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231
Information Provided by:
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. To fold the rear seatback, pull on
the loops located on the upper seatback.
NOTE: The upper seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.
Push Button
232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loops Folded Rear Seatback
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and push the safety
catch to the left. The safety catch is located under the
center front edge of the hood.
Hood Release Lever
234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
3. Lift upward on the hood prop rod to release it from the
stowage retainer.
4. Place the hood prop rod in the hood slot to secure the
hood in the open position.
Hood Safety Latch Hood Prop Rod
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approxi-
mately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
Hood Prop Rod Slot
236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights and fog lights.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic
system off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237
Information Provided by:
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
this feature.
NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-
tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF
position while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off
the headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval
begins when the headlight switch is turned off.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on, or place
the ignition in ACC or RUN, the system will cancel the
delay.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
•The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds of
placing the ignition in the OFF position to activate this
feature.
•The headlight delay time is programmable using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-
ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
•The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
•Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
•To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-
ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-
beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
dealer.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239
Information Provided by:
To Activate
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
To Deactivate
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever once again to
reactivate the system.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
The Daytime Running Lights will come on whenever the
ignition is placed in the RUN position, the headlights are
off and the parking brake is off. The headlight switch
must be used for normal nighttime driving.
NOTE: The Daytime Running Lights can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is built into the headlight
switch.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the
headlight switch. To turn off the front fog lights, either
press the headlight switch a second time or turn off the
headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Fog Light Switch
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241
Information Provided by:
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
steering column.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
•If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
•A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Elec-
tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will turn on the high beams headlights until the lever is
released.
NOTE: If the flash to pass is held for 20 seconds the
feature will deactivate.
Front Map/Reading Lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the lens.
To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
Front Map/Reading Lights
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243
Information Provided by:
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
is pressed.
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light, but not the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights.
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the right dimmer control upward or downward to
increase or decrease the brightness of the FIB (if
equipped), of the door handle lights and of the door map
pocket lights.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Door Handle/Ambient Light Dimmer
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245
Information Provided by:
Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID), and
radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield wipers
and washer when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
or ACC position. The multifunction lever is located on
the left side of the steering column.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be-
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc-
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent, past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
CAUTION!
•Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
•In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” posi-
tion before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
•Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247
Information Provided by:
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In
addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
feature is especially useful for road splash or over spray
from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi-
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
desires more sensitivity. The rain sense wipers will
automatically change between an intermittent wipe, slow
wipe and a fast wipe depending on the amount of
moisture that is sensed on the windshield. Place the
wiper switch in the OFF position when not using the
system.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and off using
the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
wiper speed is in the low or high position.
•The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
when ice or dried salt water is present on the wind-
shield.
•Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce rain sensor performance.
The Rain Sensing system has protective features for the
wiper blades and arms. It will not operate under the
following conditions:
•Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing
feature will not operate when the ignition is placed in
the RUN position, the vehicle is stationary and the
outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the
wiper control on the multifunction lever is moved, the
vehicle speed becomes greater than 0 mph (0 km/h) or
the outside temperature rises above freezing.
•Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature will
not operate when the ignition is placed in the RUN
position, the automatic transmission shift lever is in
the NEUTRAL position and the vehicle speed is less
than 5 mph (8 km/h), unless the wiper control on the
multifunction lever is moved or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
•Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped
with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are
not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start
mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has
placed the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position,
rain sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been
selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned
previously) exist.
250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the control handle
down. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle up until fully
engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-
ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251
Information Provided by:
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
on when the steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is located
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
screen.
•Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
turn the heating element ON.
•Press the heated steering wheel button
a second
time to turn the heating element OFF.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
•Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1—ON/OFF 3—SET-
2—RES+ 4—CANCEL
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253
Information Provided by:
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-
tronic Speed Control system has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
system can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the Electronic Speed
Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information
Display (DID) will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed
and on level ground before pressing the SET button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
the SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and
the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
NOTE: After pressing the SET button “Cruise Control
Set” message is displayed for five seconds or until
another switch is pressed.
254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
For Premium Clusters Only
•When set to analog mode: The red outer line on the
speedometer changes from red to white to identify set
speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
NOTE: After pressing the OFF button a “Cruise Control
Off” message is displayed for five seconds or until
another switch is pressed.
For Premium Clusters Only
•When set to analog mode: The white outer line on the
speedometer returns to red.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255
Information Provided by:
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the RES (+) button once will result ina1mph
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a
1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to increase until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
•Pressing the SET (-) button once will result ina1mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
•Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
•If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-
hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257
Information Provided by:
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sys-
tem Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is
changed to the ON/RUN position.
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in
REVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense® Sensors
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-
tion of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Warning Display
The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understand-
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
“Driver Information Display (DID) Settings” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
ParkSense Ready
ParkSense Off
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259
Information Provided by:
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
One-Half Second Tone
260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Slow Tone Slow Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261
Information Provided by:
Fast Tone Fast Tone
262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Fast Tone Continuous Tone
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263
Information Provided by:
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-
tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:
Continuous Tone
264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Dis-
tance
(in/cm)
Greater
than
79 in (200
cm)
79-59 in
(200-150
cm)
59-47 in
(150-120
cm)
47-39 in
(120-100
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in (30
cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast Continuous
Arc — Left
Rear
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arc — Cen-
ter Rear
None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flash-
ing
2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
Arc —
Right Rear
None None None None None 2nd Flash-
ing
1st Flashing
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265
Information Provided by:
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled using the
Uconnect® System. The available choices are: Off, Sound
Only, or Sound and Display. Refer to “Uconnect® Set-
tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
When the ParkSense® button is pushed to disable the
system, the Driver Information Display (DID) will dis-
play the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately
five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)
” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information. When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the DID will display the
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is
in REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle, and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” for
further information. When the shift lever/gear selector is
moved to REVERSE and the system has detected a
faulted condition, the DID will display the #PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SENSORS#or
#PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED#
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE OFF REAR SEN-
SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID)
make sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear
266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt
or other obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system will be automati-
cally disabled when there are faulted conditions outside of
the ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system that inhibit the
feature from functioning properly. The Driver Information
Display (DID) will actuate a single chime, once per ignition
ParkSense Unavailable Wipe Off Rear Sensors
ParkSense Unavailable Service Required
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267
Information Provided by:
cycle, and it will display the #PARKSENSE SYSTEM DIS-
ABLED#message. If “PARKSENSE SYSTEM DISABLED”
appears in the DID, cycle the ignition. If the message
appears again, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
Clean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-
age the sensors.
ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
•Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system oper-
ating properly.
•Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense®.
•When you turn ParkSense® off, the DID will display
“PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you turn
ParkSense® off, it remains off until you turn it on
again, even if you cycle the ignition key.
ParkSense System Disabled
268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned OFF, the DID will
display “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE.
•
Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care not to
scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be covered
with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The
ParkSense® system might not detect an obstacle behind
the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a false indication
that an obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
•
Use the ParkSense® switch to turn the ParkSense®
system OFF if objects such as bicycle carriers, trailer
hitches, etc. are placed within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear
fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the system
misinterpreting a close object as a sensor problem,
causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the DID.
CAUTION!
•ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
•The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Drivers must be careful when backing up even
when using ParkSense®. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure
to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.
You are responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Before using ParkSense®, it is strongly recom-
mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the
vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer to the
obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker
sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-
bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false
indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with a caution
note to “check entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will disappear. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle
above the rear License plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE, the rear
camera mode is exited and the last selected touchscreen
appears again.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned On, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed ex-
ceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
#PARK#or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
Fixed guide lines are overlaid on the image to illustrate
the width of the vehicle.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has pro-
grammable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
the vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271
Information Provided by:
The following table shows the approximate distances for
each zone:
Zone Distance to the rear of the vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)
Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
•To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
(Continued)
272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-
mended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and storage for sunglasses. Universal Garage Door
Opener (HomeLink®) and power sunroof switches may
also be included, if equipped.
Overhead Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273
Information Provided by:
Front Map/Reading Lights
Lights are mounted in the overhead console. Each light
can be turned on by pressing the lens.
To turn the lights off, press the lens a second time.
The lights also turn on when a door is opened. The lights
will also turn on when the UNLOCK button on the RKE
is pressed.
Sunglass Bin Door
At the front of the console a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses. The storage compart-
ment access is a “push/push” design. Push the chrome
pad on the door to open. Push the chrome pad on the
door to close.
Front Map/Reading Lights
274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three remote controls (hand-
held transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security
systems. The HomeLink® unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three differ-
ent HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is
located above the center button.
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Sunglass Bin Door
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Consoles
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275
Information Provided by:
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate transmis-
sion of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
•Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
•If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manu-
factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1—DoorOpener 2—TrainingButton
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277
Information Provided by:
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-
ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
HomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
activates, programming is complete.
NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
steps.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you would like
to program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Simultaneously push and hold both the HomeLink®
button you want to program and the hand-held trans-
mitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi-
cator light. HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Re-
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pressed.
•To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non — Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™, place
the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279
Information Provided by:
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-
nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-
mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you press and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•If the indicator light stays on constantly, program-
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
•To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
programming, plug it back in at this time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the
programmed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate opera-
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office light-
ing, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may
also be used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281
Information Provided by:
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
•Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmit-
ter.
•Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
•Did you unplug the device for programming and
remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal trans-
ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets
or other objects are in the path of the door or gate.
Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener
(Continued)
282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required by
Federal safety standards. This includes most garage
door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not
use a garage door opener without these safety fea-
tures. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet
at
HomeLink.com for safety information or assis-
tance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
•The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-
pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
•The term IC before the certification/registration num-
ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-
fications were met.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283
Information Provided by:
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
•Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
•In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-
gers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
Power Sunroof Switch
284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati-
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
forward again.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285
Information Provided by:
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-
struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-
tion if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing
the sunroof, attempt to remove the obstruction and then
press and hold the switch forward until the sunroof fully
closes.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
286 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS — IF EQUIPPED
The 12 Volt (13 Amp) instrument panel power outlet is
located on the lower instrument panel, below the climate
controls. The power outlet has power available when the
ignition switch is in the ACC or RUN position. The
power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar
lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package).
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR® cigar
knob and element must be used.
Instrument Panel Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 287
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
•Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
There is also a 12 Volt power outlet located in the center
console. This power outlet has power available only
when the ignition is placed in the ACC or RUN position
(if equipped).
Center Console Outlet
288 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
•Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
•Do not touch with wet hands.
•Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
•If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
Underhood Fuses (Power Outlet Fuses)
1—F84Fuse20AYellowCigarLighter
2 — F30 Fuse 20 A Yellow Center Console Outlet
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 289
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
•Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-
tently and with greater caution.
•After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or acces-
sory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
290 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CUPHOLDERS
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the center console forward
of the armrest between the front seats.
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide conve-
nient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining
a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
Front Cupholders
Rear Seat Cupholders
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 291
Information Provided by:
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel. Pull on the release handle to
open the glove compartment.
Glove Compartment
Opened Glove Compartment
292 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Console Features
An open storage area, or cubby bin, is located in the
center console forward of the shift lever.
There is a storage compartment located under the center
console armrest. If equipped, the 12 Volt power outlet,
USB and Aux jack are located here.
Pull upward on the release handle, located on the front of
the armrest, to open the storage compartment.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-
ment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
Center Console
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 293
Information Provided by:
Door Storage
The door panels contain storage areas.
Front Door Trim Storage
Rear Door Trim Storage
294 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Rear Seat Armrest Storage — If Equipped
For rear passengers there is a storage bin located in the
armrest. Lift upward on the latch to open the storage
compartment.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Area — 60/40 Split-Folding Rear Seat — If
Equipped
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling the
seatback loops between the seatbacks and the bolsters.
When the seats are folded down, they provide a continu-
ous, nearly-flat extension of the load floor.
NOTE: The rear seatback loops can be tucked away
when not in use.
Rear Armrest Storage
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 295
Information Provided by:
After releasing the seatback, it can be folded forward. When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Rear Seatback Loops Folded Rear Seatback
296 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper sta-
bility for child seats and/or passengers. An improp-
erly latched seat could cause serious injury.
•The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
•To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
WARNING!
The weight and position of cargo and passengers can
change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in per-
sonal injury, follow these guidelines for loading your
vehicle:
•Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as pos-
sible.
•Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
•Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or be-
come a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 297
Information Provided by:
Ski Pass-Through
There is a ski pass-through door located behind the rear
seat armrest that allows longer items, such as snow skis,
to be stored in the rear cargo area. Lower the armrest and
pull downward on the latch to open the ski pass-through
door.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control. Press this button to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate
when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window
defroster automatically turns off after approximately 15
minutes. For an additional 15 minutes of operation, press
the button a second time.
Ski Pass-Through
298 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 299
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
!INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES ..........304
!INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE (EVIC) .....305
!INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
ANALOG (DID) ........................306
!INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM
DIGITAL (DID) ........................307
!INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS .....308
!ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) .......................321
▫Two Button EVIC — If Equipped ..........322
▫Oil Change Indicator ...................330
!DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID.......332
▫Four Button DID — If Equipped ...........333
▫Oil Change Indicator ...................349
!Uconnect® SETTINGS ...................351
▫Buttons On The Faceplate................351
▫Buttons On The Touchscreen..............352
▫Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
System 8.4 Settings ....................352
!Uconnect® 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM
RADIO ..............................366
4
Information Provided by:
▫Operating Instructions — Radio Mode.......367
▫Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD
And MP3 Audio Play...................372
▫Notes On Playing MP3 Files .............374
▫Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ..............................377
▫INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) ..............................377
▫Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode . . . .377
▫Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus
(USB) — If Equipped ...................378
▫Security ............................378
!CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED .............379
▫CD Player Operating Instructions ..........380
!iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect®
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED ........380
▫Connecting The iPod® Or External USB
Device .............................381
▫Using This Feature.....................382
▫Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons ...................383
▫Play Mode ..........................383
▫List Or Browse Mode...................384
▫Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) .......386
!STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ......387
▫Radio Operation ......................388
▫CD Player ...........................388
!CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE ...........389
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
!RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES ............................389
!CLIMATE CONTROLS ...................390
▫Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If
Equipped ...........................390
▫Uconnect® 8.4 Climate Controls — If
Equipped ...........................395
▫Climate Control Functions ...............400
▫Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ......402
▫Operating Tips .......................404
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1—AirDemister 5—GloveCompartment 9—TrunkRelease
2 — Outlet 6 — Climate Control Hard Controls/
Uconnect® System Hard Controls
10 — Hood Release
3 — Instrument Cluster 7 — Power Outlet 11 — Dimmer Control
4 — Radio/Uconnect® System 8 — Ignition Switch 12 — Headlight Switch
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — BASE (EVIC)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Equipped
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM ANALOG (DID)
Driver Information Display (DID) Equipped
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM DIGITAL (DID)
Driver Information Display (DID) Equipped
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
Information Provided by:
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
This gauge measures engine revolutions-per-minute
(RPM x 1000).
2. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when using re-
placement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
3. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle
is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on, a continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
Information Provided by:
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera-
ture. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera-
ture when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an autho-
rized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
5. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position. It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
NOTE:
•The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on
momentarily each time the ignition switch is placed
in the ON/RUN.
•Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
•The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
6. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
7. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine coolant temperature is too high,
this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will
sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve-
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
Do In Emergencies” for further information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
Information Provided by:
For vehicles equipped with a premium cluster this indi-
cator will display in the DID. Refer to ”Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID) — If Equipped” for further
information.
8. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the high beam head-
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for-
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
9. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON/
RUN position, this light will turn on for four to
eight seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb
check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will
sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the
driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know
Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
10. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS)/Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-
sary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for ap-
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
Information Provided by:
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
11. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Con-
trol (ESC) is off.
12. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
13. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
14. Power Steering System Warning
This light is used to manage the electrical
warning of the EPS (Power Steering System).
Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
15. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the NEUTRAL position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position
and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not
come on during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
16. Air Bag Warning Light
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
further information.
17. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
18. Fuel Door Reminder
The arrow in this symbol is a reminder that the
Fuel Filler Door is located on the right side of
the vehicle.
19. Electronic Speed Control Set Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control has been set.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Information Provided by:
20. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 3.0 gal
(11.0 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
21. Park/Headlight ON Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the park
lights or headlights are turned on.
22. Odometer/EVIC/DID Display — As Equipped
Odometer Display
The odometer display shows the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. If your
odometer needs to be repaired or serviced, the repair
technician should leave the odometer reading the same
as it was before the repair or service. If s/he cannot do so,
then the odometer must be set at zero, and a sticker must
be placed in the door jamb stating what the odometer
reading was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
EVIC/DID display. It displays the gear position of the
automatic transmission.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
instrument cluster. For further information, refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
Driver Information Display (DID)
The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-
interactive display that is located in the instrument
cluster. For further information, refer to “Driver Informa-
tion Display (DID)”.
23. Charging System Warning Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is first placed in ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
24. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
Information Provided by:
25. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
26. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission con-
trol systems. The light will illuminate when placing the
ignition in ON/RUN from the OFF position, before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on when turning
the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as poor fuel quality, etc., may
illuminate the MIL after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several of your
typical driving cycles. In most situations, the vehicle will
drive normally and will not require towing.
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
27. Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the
light turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-
nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
28. Selectable DID Information
This area of the cluster will display selectable informa-
tion such as compass, outside temperature, etc.). For
further information, refer to “Driver Information Display
(DID) — If Equipped”.
29. Electronic Speed Control Indicator
•Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
•Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is SET. For further information,
refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
30. Yellow Driver Information Display (DID) Reconfigu-
rable Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable Yellow telltales (Low
Fuel Telltale, Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator,
Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale). For further
information, refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)”.
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
31. Red Driver Information Display (DID) Reconfigu-
rable Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales (Door(s)
Ajar, Oil Pressure Warning Telltale, Charging System
Telltale, Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale, Engine
Temperature Warning Telltale, Electric Power Steering
Malfunction). For further information, refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)”.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-
tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays #pop up#
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
•Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the #Messages#main menu item. Ex-
amples of this message type are #Right Front Turn Signal
Lamp Out#and #Low Tire Pressure#.
•Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are #Turn Signal On#(if a turn signal
is left on) and #Lights On#(if driver leaves the vehicle).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Information Provided by:
•Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
#Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar#and #Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start#.
•Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An
example of this message type is #Automatic High Beams
On#.
Two Button EVIC — If Equipped
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The EVIC consists of the following:
•Odometer
•Digital Vehicle Speed
•Trip
•Range To Empty
•Average Fuel Economy
•Current Fuel Economy
•Stored Messages
•Oil Life
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Settings
•Units
•Language
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons (Two–Button EVIC
Controls)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Information Provided by:
•UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menus (Odometer,
Digital Vehicle Speed, Trip Info, Range To
Empty, Average Fuel Economy, Current Fuel
Economy, Stored Messages, Settings).
•RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the sub-menu screens of a main menu
item. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button
for two seconds to reset displayed/selected
features that can be reset.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Messages
•Key Fob Battery Low
•Wrong Key Fob
•Key Fob Damaged
•Key In Ignition
•Left Turn Signal Out
•Right Turn Signal Out
•Turn Signal On
•Lights On
•Low Beam Headlight Out
•High Beam Headlight Out
•License Plate Light Out
•Backup Light Out
•Brake Light Out
•Parking Light Out
•Service Air Bag System
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Service Air Bag Warning Light
•Washer Fluid Low
•Parking Brake Engaged
•Brake Fluid Low
•Service Electronic Braking System
•Engine Temperature Hot
•Battery Voltage Low
•Oil Pressure Low
•Fuel Low
•Service Antilock Brake System
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Transmission Too Hot
•Service Power Steering
•Oil Temperature Hot
•Check Fuel Cap
•Oil Change Due
•Service Tire Pressure System
•Inflate Tire to XX
•Coolant Low
•Rain Sensor Fail
•Traction Control Off
•Engine Warming Wait To Start
•Too Cold Plug In Heater
•Cruise Off
•Cruise Ready
•Cruise Set To XXX MPH
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Information Provided by:
•Cruise Set To XXX km/h
•Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•Door Open
•Doors Open
•Trunk Open
•Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
•Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset
•Remote Start Active Key To Run
•Remote Start Aborted Door Open
•Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
•Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
•Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
•Remote Start Active Push Start Button
EVIC Main Menu
To step to each main menu feature push and release the
UP button once for each step. A step from the last item in
the list will cause the first item in the feature list to be
displayed. The following features are in the main menu:
•Odometer
•Digital Vehicle Speed
•Trip
•Range To Empty
•Average Fuel Economy
•Current Fuel Economy
•Stored Messages
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Oil Life
•Settings
•Units
•Language
NOTE:
For features in the EVIC that can be reset (Average
Fuel Economy), the EVIC prompts a reset with a RIGHT
arrow button graphic and the word RESET next to it.
Trip Info
Push and release the UP arrow button until the Trip Info
icon is highlighted in the EVIC. Push and release the
RIGHT arrow button to display the following three trip
features in the next screen:
•Trip A
•Trip B
•Elapsed Time
Push the UP buttons to cycle through all the Trip Com-
puter functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following informa-
tion:
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
Information Provided by:
Resetting A Trip Info Function
To Reset any of the three Trip Info functions, select the
function you want to reset using the UP button. Push the
RIGHT arrow button until the feature display zero.
Range To Empty (RTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. RTE cannot be reset.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the RTE display value.
When the RTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the RTE display will change
to a text display of #LOW FUEL”. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
LOW FUEL text and a new RTE value will display.
Average Fuel Economy
This feature shows the average fuel economy since the
last reset. When Average Fuel Economy is selected, The
word “RESET>” (with right arrow) appears next to it.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will reset Average Fuel
Economy which displays “0” immediately after reset.
Then, the history information will be erased, and the
averaging will continue from the last fuel average read-
ing before the reset.
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Tire PSI
Push and release the UP button until #Tire Pressure#is
displayed.
Tire pressure information is displayed as follows:
•If tire pressure is OK for all tires, a vehicle graphic is
displayed with tire pressure values in each corner or
the graphic.
•If one or more tires have low pressure, Inflate Tire To
XX and a vehicle graphic are displayed with tire
pressure values in each corner of the graphic. Tire
pressure values that are too low will be flashing.
•If the Tire Pressure System requires service, #Service
TPM System#is displayed. Tire Pressure is an informa-
tion only function and cannot be reset.
Stored Messages
When a stored warning message is present, this
icon is displayed in the lower left side of the
Tire Pressure menu. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are.
Settings — EVIC Units And Language Selection
Displays the units used for the Outside Temperature,
Average and Current Fuel Economy, Distance to Empty
and Tire Pressure features. Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to toggle units between #U.S.#and #MET-
RIC#.
Push and release the UP arrow button until the Language
is displayed, then push and release the Right arrow
button to select English, Francais, or Espanol depending
on availability.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Information Provided by:
Oil Change Indicator
•Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
display in the EVIC display for approximately 10
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate,
dependent upon your personal driving style.
•Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position
if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, push and release the MENU
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Push the accelerator pedal fully, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Push the accelerator pedal fully, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Using The EVIC Menu
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
•Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
•Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info”.
•Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
•
Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button to reset the
gauge and numeric display to 100% for ”Oil Life.”
•Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the EVIC
screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
•Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
•Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info”.
•Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
•Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to access the ”Oil Life Reset” screen.
•Push and hold the DOWN
arrow button until the
screen shows 100% oil life.
•Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the EVIC
screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
Information Provided by:
DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY DID
The DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) features an
interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster.
The main display area will normally display the main
menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main
menu. The main display area also displays #pop up#
messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-
ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall
into several categories:
•Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of
message takes control of the main display area for five
seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of
the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the
condition that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the #Messages#main menu item. As long
as there is a stored message, an #i#will be displayed in the
DID’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this
message type are #Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out#
and #Low Tire Pressure#.
•Unstored Messages
This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the
condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples
of this message type are #Turn Signal On#(if a turn signal
is left on) and #Lights On#(if driver leaves the vehicle).
•Unstored Messages Until RUN
These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start
feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition
is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are
#Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar#and #Press Brake
Pedal and Push Button to Start#.
•Five Second Unstored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of mes-
sage takes control of the main display area for five seconds
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
message type is #Automatic High Beams On#.
Four Button DID — If Equipped
This system allows the driver to select a variety of useful
information by pushing the switches mounted on the
steering wheel. The DID consists of the following main
menu items:
•Speedometer
•Analog Vehicle Speed
•Vehicle Info
•Fuel Economy
•Trip A
•Trip B
•Audio
•Stored Messages
•Screen Setup
Driver Information Display DID Cluster
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
Information Provided by:
The system allows the driver to select information by
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
•UP Arrow Button
Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll
upward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stored
Messages, Screen Set Up).
•DOWN Arrow Button
Push and release the DOWN arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu and
sub-menus (Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B,
Stored Messages, Screen Set Up).
•RIGHT Arrow Button
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to
access the information screens or sub-menu
screens of a main menu item. Push and hold
the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds to
reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.
DID Steering Wheel Buttons (Four–Button DID
Controls)
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•LEFT Arrow Button
Push the LEFT arrow button to return to the
main menu from an info screen or sub-menu
item.
DID Displays
The DID displays are located in the center portion of the
cluster and consists of the follow sections:
1 — Speedometer (Digital or Analog) (km/h or mph)
2 — Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for
non critical warnings, red for critical warnings and white
for on demand information.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Information Provided by:
3 — Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to
Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG)
4 — Menu Titles / Odometer
5 — Menu Set (Selectable Icons)
6 — Shift Lever Status (PRNDL)
7 — Reconfigurable Telltales
9 — Sub-menu Current Position — Whenever there are
sub-menus available, the position within the sub-menus
is shown here.
DID Messages
•Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Service Airbag System
•Traction Control Off
•Washer Fluid Low
•Oil Pressure Low
•Oil Change Due
•Fuel Low
•Service Antilock Brake System
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Service Power Steering
•Cruise Off
•Cruise Ready
•Cruise Set To XXX MPH
•Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to
XX”
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Service Tire Pressure System
•Parking Brake Engaged
•Brake Fluid Low
•Service Electronic Braking System
•Engine Temperature Hot
•Service Electronic Throttle Control
•Lights On
•Right Turn Signal Light Out
•Left Turn Signal Light Out
•Turn Signal On
•Vehicle Not In Park
•Key In Ignition
•Key In Ignition Lights On
•Remote Start Active Key to Run
•Remote Start Active Push Start Button
•Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low
•Remote Start Aborted Too Cold
•Remote Start Aborted Door Open
•Remote Start Aborted Hood Open
•Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open
•Remote Start Aborted Time Expired
•Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset
•Service Airbag System
•Service Airbag Warning Light
•Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled
•Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Information Provided by:
•Front Seatbelts Unbuckled
•Door Open
•Doors Open
•Trunk Open
•Gear Not Available
•Shift Not Allowed
•Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse
•Autostick Unavailable Service Required
•Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.
•Transmission Getting Hot Press Brake
•Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool
•Transmission Cool Ready to Drive
•Service Transmission
•Service Shifter
•Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling
•Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On
•Washer Fluid Low
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the
white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the
middle, and red telltales on the left.
DID Yellow Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable yellow caution tell-
tales. These telltales include:
•Low Fuel Telltale
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.5 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the wind-
shield washer fluid is low.
•Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale — If
Equipped
This telltale indicates that the transmission
fluid temperature is running hot. This may
occur with severe usage, such as trailer towing.
If this telltale turns on, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEU-
TRAL and run the engine at idle or faster until the light
turns off.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-
ture Warning Telltale illuminated will eventually
cause severe transmission damage or transmission
failure.
WARNING!
If the Transmission Temperature Warning Telltale is
illuminated and you continue operating the vehicle,
in some circumstances you could cause the fluid to
boil over, come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
components and cause a fire.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339
Information Provided by:
DID Red Telltales
This area will show reconfigurable red telltales. These
telltales include:
•Door Ajar
This telltale turns on when one or more doors
are ajar. The telltale will show which doors are
ajar.
•Oil Pressure Warning Telltale
This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If
the light turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut
off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound
when this light turns on.
•Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
•Charging System Telltale
This telltale shows the status of the electrical
charging system. If the telltale stays on or comes
on while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-
essential electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at
idle). If the charging system telltale remains on, it means
that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See
an authorized dealer.
•If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
•Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Telltale
This telltale informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If the
telltale comes on while driving, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized dealer.
340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•If a problem is detected, the telltale will come on while
the engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
placed in the PARK position. The telltale should turn
off.
•If the telltale remains lit with the engine running, your
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an
authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the
telltale is flashing when the engine is running, imme-
diate service is required. You may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall
and your vehicle may require towing.
•Engine Temperature Warning Telltale
This telltale warns of an overheated engine con-
dition. As temperatures rise and the gauge ap-
proaches H, this telltale will illuminate and a single
chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
•If the telltale turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it
off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for more information.
•Electric Power Steering Malfunction
This telltale is on when the Electric Power
Steering is not operating and needs service.
DID White Telltales
•Electronic Speed Control ON
This telltale will illuminate white when the elec-
tronic speed control is ON. For further informa-
tion, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Un-
derstanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341
Information Provided by:
DID Green Telltales
•Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will illuminate green when the
electronic speed control is SET. For further
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Con-
trol” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle.”
Analog Or Digital Speedometer Selection
Full Speedometer Analog Icon
Full Speedometer Digital Icon
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Analog or Digital display icon is highlighted in the
DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to change
the display between analog and digital.
Vehicle Speed MPH / km/h
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Speed icon is high-
lighted in the DID. Push the RIGHT arrow
button to view a digital display of the current
speed in MPH or km/h. Pushing the RIGHT arrow
button a second time will toggle the unit of measure
between mph or km/h. Push the LEFT arrow button to
return to the main menu.
NOTE: Changing the unit of measure in the Vehicle
Speed menu will not change the unit of measure in the
DID.
342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Vehicle Info
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Vehicle Info icon is highlighted
in the DID. Push and release the RIGHT arrow
to scroll through the following information
sub-menus using the UP and DOWN arrows:
Vehicle Info Sub Menus
Press and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
#Tire Pressure#is highlighted in the DID. Press and
release the RIGHT arrow button and one of the following
will be displayed:
•Tire Pressure
•Coolant Temp
•Oil Temp
•Oil Life
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Fuel Economy icon is high-
lighted. Push the RIGHT arrow button and the
next screen will display the following:
•Average Fuel Economy
•Range To Empty (RTE)
•Current Fuel Economy
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343
Information Provided by:
The DID has the capability of displaying an interactive
flower through the Fuel Economy sub-menu which will
add one flower petal for every 2.5 Miles Per Gallon
(MPG) (1.06 km per liter (km/l) increment. Once the
vehicle reached 30 MPG the DID will display a full
flower.
Fuel Economy Analog Display Fuel Economy Digital Display
344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Fuel Economy MPG Flower Analog Display Fuel Economy MPG Flower Digital Display
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345
Information Provided by:
Trip A
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip A icon/title is highlighted
in the DID. The Trip A information will display
the following:
•Distance mi or km/h
•Average. mpg or L/100km
•Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa-
tion.
Push the DOWN arrow button to enter Trip B.
Trip B
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Trip B icon/title is highlighted
in the DID. The Trip B information will display
the following:
•Distance mi or km/h
•Average. mpg or L/100 km
•Elapsed Time
Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the informa-
tion.
346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Stored Messages
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Messages display icon is high-
lighted in the DID. This feature shows the
number of stored warning messages. Pushing
the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what the
stored messages are. Push the LEFT arrow button to
return to the Main Menu.
Screen Setup
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
button until the Screen Setup display icon is
highlighted in the DID. Push and release the
RIGHT arrow button to enter the Screen Setup
submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument cluster
as well as the location that information is displayed.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup display icon is highlighted in the DID.
Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to enter the
Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature allows
you to change the location that information is displayed
within the instrument cluster. Use the UP and DOWN
buttons to highlight a screen setup location (i.e., Upper
Left, Upper Right, etc.) then push the RIGHT arrow
button to select the location and make changes. Push the
UP and DOWN buttons to select the information you
would like to display in that location (i.e., Date, Time,
Outside Temp, etc.) and push the RIGHT arrow button to
save the display setting. You can push the LEFT arrow
button at any time to back out of a sub-menu selection.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
The Screen Setup items are only available at
speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). All other menu items are
not active when in Screen Setup. If the vehicle is shifted
into gear, this feature is locked out and the main screen will
display “Screen Setup Unavailable While In Motion”.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
•Speedometer
Analog 1
Analog 2
Digital 1 (default setting)
Digital 2
•Gear Display
Standard (PRND –/+) (default setting)
Single Character (D)
Word (Drive)
•Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp (default setting)
Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A
Trip B
•Upper Right
None
Compass (default setting)
Outside Temp
348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Time
Range To Empty (RTE)
Average MPG
Current MPG
Trip A
Trip B
•Lower Left
None (default setting)
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
•Lower Right
None (default setting)
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
•Restore To Defaults (Restores All Settings To De-
fault Settings)
Cancel
Okay
Oil Change Indicator
•Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Due” message will
flash in the DID display for approximately 10 seconds
after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349
Information Provided by:
•Unless reset, this message will continue to display
each time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position or cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position
if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™. To turn off the
message temporarily, push and release the MENU
button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the
following procedure.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK position.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
Using The DID Menu
Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry
•Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
•Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info”.
•Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
•Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to access the ”Oil Life Reset” screen.
350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Push and hold the DOWN
arrow button to reset
the gauge and numeric display to 100% for ”Oil
Life.”
•Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the DID
screen.
Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry
•Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to
the ON/RUN position (Do not start the engine.)
•Push and release the DOWN
arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-
hicle Info”.
•Push and release the RIGHT
arrow button to
access the ”Oil Life” screen.
•Push and hold the RIGHT
arrow button for one
second to access the ”Oil Life Reset” screen.
•Push and hold the DOWN
arrow button to reset
the gauge and numeric display to 100% for ”Oil
Life.”
•Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the DID
screen.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate that allows
you to access and change the customer programmable
features.
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351
Information Provided by:
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-
ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through
menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), press the
center of the control knob one or more times to select or
change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® Touchscreen.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
System 8.4 Settings
Press the More button on the touchscreen, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display the menu
setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect® system allows
you to access programmable features that may be
equipped such as Display, Clock, Safety & Driving Assis-
tance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort & Re-
mote Start, Engine Off Operation, Compass Settings,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth and SIRIUS Setup.
NOTE: Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
time.
When making a selection, press the button on the touch-
screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired
mode press and release the preferred setting until a
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected.
Once the setting is complete press the Back Arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu or
press the X button on the touchscreen to close out of the
settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons
on the touchscreens on the right side of the screen will
allow you to toggle up or down through the available
settings.
352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Display Mode
When in this display you may select one of the auto
display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-
lease the Day, Night or Auto button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
even though the headlights are on.
•Display Brightness With Headlights ON
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
•Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the + and –
setting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
•Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of three languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions
and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set
Language button on the touchscreen and then press the
desired language button on the touchscreen until a check-
mark appears next to the language, showing that setting
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353
Information Provided by:
has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
•Units
When in this display, you may select to have the EVIC,
odometer, and navigation system (if equipped) changed
between US and Metric units of measure. Press US or
Metric until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
•Voice Response Length
When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-
sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the Brief or Detailed button on the touch-
screen until a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
•Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a press screen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the Touchscreen Beep
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-
lected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
•Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Sync With GPS Time — If Equipped
When in this display, you may automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync with GPS Time
setting press the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
•Set Time Hours
When in this display, you may adjust the hours. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
•Set Time Minutes
When in this display, you may adjust the minutes. The
“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu or press the “X” button on
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
•Time Format
When in this display, you may select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs
or 24hrs setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355
Information Provided by:
•Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
•Park Assist — If Equipped
The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind
the vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in RE-
VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph
(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only,
Sound and Display, or turned OFF. To change the Park
Assist status, press and release the OFF, Sound Only or
Sounds and Display button. Then press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense® Rear
Park Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle” for system function and operating information.
•Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
can be set to Off, Lights or Lights and Chime. The Blind
Spot Alert feature can be activated in “Lights” mode.
When this mode is selected, the Blind Spot Monitor
(BSM) system is activated and will only show a visual
alert in the outside mirrors. When “Lights & Chime”
mode is activated, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) will
show a visual alert in the outside mirrors as well as an
audible alert when the turn signal is on. When “Off” is
selected, the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is deacti-
vated. To change the Blind Spot Alert status, press the
Off, Lights or Lights & Chime button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
in the BSM not operating to specification.
•ParkView® Backup Camera
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a
caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the
top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will
disappear. The ParkView® camera is located on the rear
of the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your
selection, press the ParkView® Backup Camera button on
the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
•Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automati-
cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the Rain
Sensing button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Interior Accent Lighting
When this feature is selected, the interior accent lighting
surrounding the instrument panel will illuminate. To
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357
Information Provided by:
make your selection, press the Interior Accent Lighting
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu.
•Headlight Illumination On Approach
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the + or - button on the touchscreen to select your
desired time interval. Press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
•Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-
proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the Headlights With Wipers button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
•Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To
make your selection, press the Auto High Beams button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Lights/Automatic High Beam
Headlamp Control— If Equipped” in “Understanding
The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.
358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Daytime Running Lights
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the Daytime Running Lights button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-
ing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
•Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. This feature may be
selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature
selected. To make your selection, press the Flash Lamps
with Lock button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
•Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the
PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is
opened. To make your selection, press the Auto Unlock
On Exit button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch-
screen to return to the previous menu.
•Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. To make your selection,
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359
Information Provided by:
press the Flash Lights With Lock button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicat-
ing that the setting has been selected. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
•Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the Sound Horn With Lock button on the touch-
screen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indi-
cating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
•Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the Sound Horn With Remote Start button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
•1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, only the
driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button. When
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is selected, you must press
the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button twice to unlock the
passenger’s doors. When Unlock All Doors On 1st Press
is selected, all of the doors will unlock on the first press
of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive
Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of
Key Fob Unlocks is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With
Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks is pro-
grammed pressing the handle more than once will only
result in the driver’s door opening. If driver door first is
selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or
use RKE transmitter).
•Passive Entry
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) without having to press the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the Passive Entry button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
•Interior Motion Detection Alarm
This feature will sound the vehicles alarm when motion
is detected inside the vehicle while locked. To make your
selection, press the Interior Motion Detection Alarm
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361
Information Provided by:
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start
button on the touchscreen the following settings will be
available.
•Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the Sound Horn With Remote Start button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
•Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With
Vehicle Start — If Equipped
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and
heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). To make your
selection, press the Auto Heated Seats button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
•Engine Off Power Delay
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, Uconnect® system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front
door will cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off
Power Delay status press the “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,#
“5 minutes” or “10 minutes” button on the touchscreen.
Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to have
the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when
exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off Delay
status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to
select your desired time interval. Press the back arrow
button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Compass Settings
After pressing the Compass Settings button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
•Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
differences the variance should be set for the zone where
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly set,
the compass will automatically compensate for the differ-
ences, and provide the most accurate compass heading.
NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of
the instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones,
Laptops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass
module is located, and it can cause interference with the
compass sensor, and it may give false readings.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363
Information Provided by:
•Perform Compass Calibration
Press the Calibration button on the touchscreen to change
this setting. This compass is self-calibrating, which elimi-
nates the need to manually reset the compass. When the
vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic and the
EVIC will display CAL until the compass is calibrated.
You may also calibrate the compass by pressing the ON
button on the touchscreen and completing one or more
360-degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
metallic objects) until the CAL indicator displayed in the
EVIC turns off. The compass will now function normally.
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
•Balance/Fade
When in this display you may adjust the Balance and
Fade settings.
•Equalizer
When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and
Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the + and –
setting buttons on the touchscreens or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons on the
touchscreens. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press
directly on the desired setting.
•Speed Adjusted Volume
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
press the Off, 1, 2 or 3 button on the touchscreen. Then
press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Music Info Cleanup
This feature helps organize music files for optimized music
navigation. To make your selection, press the Music Info
Cleanup button on the touchscreen, select On or Off fol-
lowed by pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
•Surround Sound — If Equipped
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
To make your selection, press the Surround Sound button
on the touchscreen, select On or Off followed by pressing
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available.
•Paired Devices
This feature shows which phones are paired to the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer
to the Uconnect® Supplement.
SiriusXM Setup
After pressing the “SIRIUS Setup” button on the touch-
screen the following settings will be available.
•Channel Skip
SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude
undesirable channels while scanning. To make your selec-
tion, press the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen,
select the channels you would like to skip followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
•Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen in order to re-
subscribe.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365
Information Provided by:
Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to
access the Subscription Information screen.
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Uconnect® 200 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH
CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SiriusXM
RADIO
Uconnect® 200
366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME
control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a
second time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons
to search for
the next listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the
right switch to seek up and the left switch to seek
down. The radio will remain tuned to the new station
until you make another selection. Holding either but-
ton will bypass stations without stopping until you
release it.
TIME Button
Push the TIME button to alternate display of the time and
radio frequency.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours are
highlighted.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367
Information Provided by:
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side ENTER/
BROWSE control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will highlight.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
5. To exit, press the TIME button or press the BACK
button to return to the previous menu.
The clock can also be set by pressing the MENU button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
MENU button until CLOCK appears in the display.
Using the ENTER/BROWSE button select SET TIME,
and then follow the above procedure, starting at Step 2.
NOTE: Time format has the options of 12HR or 24HR.
Selecting one of these options will change the way the
clock is displayed.
INFO Button
Push the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pushing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Setting The Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance Or
Fade
To set the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade
settings press the AUDIO button to access the Audio
sub-menu.
The Audio sub-menu can also be reached by pressing the
MENU button until AUDIO appears in the display. Push
the ENTER/BROWSE button to select the AUDIO menu
and use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to highlight select
Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade. Once the
desired selection is highlighted, push the ENTER/
BROWSE button to select the item and use the TUNE/
SCROLL knob to adjust the setting.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button and BASS will dis-
play. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise to
increase or counterclockwise to decrease the bass tones.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a second time and
MID RANGE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the mid-range tones.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a third time and
TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to de-
crease the treble tones.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a fourth time and
BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL con-
trol knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the
sound level from the Left or Right side speakers.
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button a fifth time and FADE
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the sound level
between the front and rear speakers.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369
Information Provided by:
Press the BACK button to exit Bass, Mid Range, Treble,
Balance or Fade.
MENU Button
Pressing the MENU button allows you to scroll between
the setting sub-menus. Once the desired sub-menu set-
ting is highlighted push the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the setting. The following items are selectable:
Radio Mode
•Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow you
to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade,
just like pushing the Audio hard control. If the BACK
button is pressed the radio will return to the Main
Menu.
•Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the
clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. After adjusting the hours, push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The min-
utes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the right
side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the ENTER/
BROWSE button to save time change.
Player Mode
•Player Browse — Selecting Player Browse will go to
the appropriate browse menu depending on the device
currently playing (will function the same as pressing
the browse button while in that mode). This will only
appear in the menu if the device currently playing can
support these features.
•Shuffle (SHFL) — This function shuffles (randomizes
the order of the files). This will only appear in the
menu if the device currently playing can support these
features.
•Repeat (RPT) — When Repeat is activated, the cur-
rently playing song will begin again when it ends. It
370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
will continue to cycle through the same song until
repeat is turned Off. Repeat will be turned off once one
for the following conditions are met: 1) The source is
ejected 2) A different track list within that source is
initiated 3) The REPEAT button is toggled OFF. This
will only appear in the menu if the device currently
playing can support these features.
•Audio — Selecting the Audio sub-menu will allow you
to adjust the Bass, Mid Range, Treble, Balance or Fade,
just like pressing the Audio hard control. If the BACK
button is pressed the radio will return to the Main
Menu.
•Clock — Selecting Clock will allow you to set the
clock. Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob. After adjusting the hours, push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to set the minutes. The min-
utes will highlight. Adjust the minutes using the right
side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Push the ENTER/
BROWSE button to save time change.
System Info
•Selecting System Info will display the software ver-
sion, serial number and SIRIUS ID.
RADIO Button
Press the button to select either AM, FM and Satellite
mode if equipped.
Buttons1-5
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory AM (A, B, C), FM (A, B, C)
and Satellite — 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371
Information Provided by:
To Set The Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press and hold the
button (1–5) you wish to lock onto this station for three
seconds.
You may add a second or third station to each pushbut-
ton by repeating the above procedure with this exception:
Press the A–B–C button to select the A, B or C mode. Each
button can be set for up to 3 stations in AM, FM and Sat.
This allows a total of 15 AM, 15 FM and 15 SAT stations
to be stored into pushbutton memory.
Player Button
Pressing the Player button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Player mode (CD, USB/iPOD®, AUX,
Bluetooth®).
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
•The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or ACC
position to operate the radio.
•This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON/RUN and the
radio ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode
and begin to play when you insert the disc. The display
will show the track number, and index time in minutes
and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
EJECT Button — Ejecting A CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button
Push the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Push the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pushing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Push this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373
Information Provided by:
RW/FF
Push and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pushed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Shuffle (SHFL) And Repeat (RPT)
This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Press the MENU button to display the Player menu. Use
the TUNE/SCROLL knob to scroll to the Shuffle or
Repeat sub-menu. Once the Shuffle or Repeat sub-menu
setting is highlighted push the ENTER/BROWSE button
to select the setting and turn it on or off.
Shuffle and Repeat cannot be active at the same time. If
one is selected while the other is currently active the
currently active one will be changed to OFF. These
settings will be dependent of the current source. If shuffle
is on in iPod®, moving to CD will not have shuffle On
unless it was previously set to On.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next ran-
domly selected track.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restric-
tions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, WMA and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file nor-
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
•Maximum number of folder levels: 8
•Maximum number of files: 255
•Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this dis-
play.)
Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
•Level 1: 12 (including a separator #.#and a three-
character extension)
•Level 2: 31 (including a separator #.#and a three-
character extension)
Multi-session disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multi-session discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as #keep disc open after
writing#are most likely multi-session discs. The use of
multi-session for CD audio or MP3 playback may result
in longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten-
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375
Information Provided by:
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG Specifi-
cation
Sampling Fre-
quency (kHz) Bit Rate (kbps)
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
48, 44.1, 32 320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16 160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback Of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
•Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
•Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
Enter/Browse Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA
Play)
Pressing the Enter/Browse button will bring up a list of
all folders on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is
done by turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Se-
lecting a folder by pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button
will begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode For MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to #elapsed
time#priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to #elapsed time#display.
Operation Instructions — Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speak-
ers.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377
Information Provided by:
Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE:
•The head unit will have no control of the AUX device.
You can only control the volume on the head unit. No
information about the song will be displayed.
•The AUX device must be turned on and the device’s
volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio is not
loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down and radio volume up.
Operation Instructions — Universal Serial Bus
(USB) — If Equipped
The USB audio input allows the user to plug in a flash
drive and utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify
the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the PLAYER button will change the mode to
USB when an iPod® or external USB drive is connected.
Pressing the ENTER/BROWSE button while in USB
mode will bring up a list of available categories within
the USB. The categories will consist of: Playlists, Artist,
Album, Genre, Audiobooks, Podcasts and all Songs..
Browsing through the categories will function the same
as iPod® browse. USB will not have folder browsing.
If the USB connected does not have any audio files and
the user selects USB as the device to play audio the screen
will display, “No audio files found.” This messaged is to
be displayed for all devices that do not have audio files
when connected and selected.
Security
If this radio is installed in a vehicle that does not have a
matching Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) an Secu-
rity code will need to be entered by the dealer.
378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
CD PLAYER — IF EQUIPPED
The single disc CD player is located in the center console.
NOTE:
•The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
before the CD player will operate.
•The CD Player is part of the radio for the Uconnect®
200.
CD Player
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379
Information Provided by:
CD Player Operating Instructions
Loading
To insert disc into the player, follow the instructions
shown:
1. Gently insert the disc with the label facing the rear of
the vehicle while the light below the loading slot is
illuminated. The disc will automatically be pulled into
the CD player.
2. Upon insertion, the disc will begin to play, and the
light below the loading slot will turn off.
EJECT (EJT) Button
If there is a disc in the CD player, press the EJT button
and the disc will eject. If you do not remove the disc
within 10 seconds, it will be reloaded.
Uconnect® — If Equipped
If equipped with Uconnect® 8.4, refer to the Uconnect®
8.4 manual for further information.
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL WITH Uconnect®
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be
plugged into the USB port.
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
If equipped with Uconnect® 8.4, refer to the Uconnect®
User’s Manual for further details on iPod®, USB, and
MP3 usage.
380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Connecting The iPod® Or External USB Device
Use the connection cable to connect an iPod® or external
USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
which is located in the center console.
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port
Center Console USB/AUX Connector Port Cable Routing
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The center console will have a position where the
iPod® or consumer electronic audio device cable can be
routed through without damaging the cable when clos-
ing the lid. A factory cut out space for the cable to be
routed may be located in the base of the center console on
either the front or side. This allows routing of the cable
without damaging it while closing the lid. If a cut out is
not available in the center console base, route the cable
away from the lid latch and in a place that will allow the
lid to close without damaging the cable.
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to
the vehicle’s iPod®/USB/MP3 control system (iPod® or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches, as described below.
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely dis-
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod®/USB/
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level.
Using This Feature
By using an iPod® cable, or an external USB device to
connect to the USB port:
•The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album,
etc.) information on the radio display.
•The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod® contents.
•The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
audio device).
382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Controlling The iPod® Or External USB Device
Using Radio Buttons
To enter the iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode and access a
connected audio device, either push the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or push the VR button and say
#USB#or #Switch to USB.#Once in the iPod®/USB/MP3
control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to iPod®/USB/MP3 control mode, the
iPod® or external USB device automatically starts Play
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio
faceplate may be used to control the iPod® or external
USB device and display data:
•Use the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select the next
or previous track.
•Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
VR button and say #Next Track.#
•Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click,
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
VR button and say #Previous Track#
•Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
•Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.
•A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
jump backward or forward respectively, for five sec-
onds.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383
Information Provided by:
•Use the << SEEK button during play mode to jump to
the start of the current track. Pressing the SEEK>>
button during play mode will jump to the next track in
the list, or press the VR button and say #Next or
Previous Track.#
•While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
•Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
press the VR button and say #Repeat ON#or #Repeat
Off.#
•Press the SHUFFLE button to play the selections on
the USB/iPod® device in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace. To stop Shuffle Mode, press
the SHUFFLE button again. To turn SHUFFLE On/Off
with Voice Commands, press the
button, wait for
the beep, and say “Shuffle On” or “Shuffle Off.”
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up Browse mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
In Browse mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod® or external
USB device.
•Preset 1 – Playlists
•Preset 2 – Artists
•Preset 3 – Albums
•Preset 4 – Genres
•Preset 5 – Audiobooks
384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
•Pressing a PRESET button will display the current list
on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
•To exit Browse mode without making a selection, press
the same PRESET button again to go back to Play
mode.
•Browse button: The Browse button will display the
top level menu of the iPod® or external USB device.
Press and then turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob
to list the top-menu item to be selected and press the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to select. This will dis-
play the next sub-menu list item on the audio device,
then follow the same steps to go to the desired track in
that list. Not all iPod® or external USB device sub-
menu levels are available on this system.
•A-B-C button: For all player devices, pressing the
A-B-C button while browsing will present an ABC
jump feature. The system will show the available first
letters of the item being browsed. If letters do not have
items they will not be shown, “_” will be shown in
their place. After selecting a letter you will be taken to
the first item of that letter within the entire list. When
a browse subcategory is selected and contains no
contents, “No items found” will be displayed on the
screen. This message times out after three seconds, and
will take you back to the submenu you were previ-
ously in.
CAUTION!
•Leaving the iPod® or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in ex-
treme heat or cold can alter the operation or dam-
age the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
(Continued)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Placing items on the iPod® or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod® or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod® or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect® phone system.
Refer to the Uconnect® Radio Supplement for further
information on Bluetooth® connectivity.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To enter BTSA mode, push either “AUX” button on the
radio or push the VR button and say “Bluetooth Stream-
ing Audio.”
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect®
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect® phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
Selecting A Different Audio Device
1. Push the PHONE button to begin.
2. After the #Ready#prompt and following the beep, say
#Setup#, then say #Select Audio Devices.#
386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the
Uconnect® phone system to list the audio devices.
Next Track
Use the SEEK UP button, or push the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track,” to jump to the next music
track on your cellular phone.
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or push the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track,” to jump to the
previous music track on your cellular phone.
Browse
Browsing is not available on a Bluetooth® Streaming
Audio (BTSA) device. Only the current song that is
playing will display info.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387
Information Provided by:
mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro-
grammed in the radio preset button.
CD Player
Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
track on the CD. Pushing the bottom of the switch once
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
beginning of the previous track if it is within eight
seconds after the current track begins to play.
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-
ing the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular
disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-
ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389
Information Provided by:
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® 8.4 system
display if equipped.
When the Uconnect® 8.4 system is in different modes
(Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and pas-
senger temperature settings will be indicated at the top of
the display.
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning — If
Equipped
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
1. Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the amount of air forced
through the ventilation system in any mode. The blower
speed increases as you move the control to the right from
the “O” (OFF) position. There are seven blower speeds.
Manual Climate Control Buttons
390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
2. Recirculation Control
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will temporar-
ily put the system in recirculation mode. This can be used
when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or
high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will
cause the LED in the control button to illuminate.
NOTE:
•Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
•The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Se-
lect the outside air position for maximum defogging.
•The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fog-
ging when the recirculation button is pressed and the
mode control is set to panel or Bi-Level.
•Recirculated air is not allowed in Defrost modes. If
the Recirculation button is pressed while in this
mode, the LED indicator will flash several times then
go out. Recirculation will be disabled automatically
is this mode is selected.
•The A/C can be deselected manually without dis-
turbing the mode control selection.
•When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
3. Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air
inside the passenger compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates cooler tempera-
tures, while rotating right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems lower
than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser
located in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt
or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
4. Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to engage the Air Conditioning. A light
will illuminate when the Air Conditioning system is
engaged. Rotating the dial left into the blue area of the
scale indicates cooler temperatures, while rotating right
into the red area indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
•MAX A/C
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
buttons at the same time.
•ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to
turn OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor.
Then, move the temperature control to the desired
temperature and select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor
modes.
5. Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air
distribution. You can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of
two of these modes. The closer the setting is to a
particular symbol, the more air distribution you receive
from that mode.
•Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the
instrument panel. These outlets can be ad-
justed to direct airflow.
392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
•Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor
outlets.
NOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot, there
is a difference in temperature between the upper and
lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor outlets.
This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but
cool conditions.
•Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
•Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and
side window demist outlets. This setting
works best in cold or snowy conditions that
require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is
good for maintaining comfort while reducing mois-
ture on the windshield.
•Front Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum blower and temperature settings for best wind-
shield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehu-
midifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393
Information Provided by:
6. Electronic Rear Window Defrost
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indica-
tor in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 15 minutes. For an addi-
tional 15 minutes of operation, press the button a second
time.
NOTE:
•You can turn off the heated mirror feature at anytime
by pressing the rear window defroster switch a
second time.
•To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
Uconnect® 8.4 Climate Controls — If Equipped
Buttons On The Faceplate
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® 8.4 screen, in the center of the instrument
panel.
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® 8.4 system screen.
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395
Information Provided by:
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On
The Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
1. MAX A/C Button
Press to change the current setting, the indicator illumi-
nates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing this function
again will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch into
manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
2. A/C Button
Press and release to change the current Air Conditioning
(A/C) setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Performing this function will cause the automatic opera-
tion to switch into manual mode and the AUTO indicator
will turn off.
3. Recirculation Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the
indicator illuminates when ON.
4. AUTO Operation Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch between
manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
Operation” for more information.
5. Front Defrost Button
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-
ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 15 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
•Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
•Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397
Information Provided by:
8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Press the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the button on the touchscreen temperature bar
towards the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
9. SYNC
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-
perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
10. Blower Control
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced
through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or
buttons on the touchscreens as follows:
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the control
clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob
counter-clockwise.
Button On The Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
•Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-
ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air
vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can
be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located
below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount
of airflow from these outlets.
•Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets
and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is
directed through the defrost and side window
demister outlets.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
•Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the defrost
and side window demister outlets.
•Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This mode works best
in cold or snowy conditions.
•Defrost Mode
Air comes from the windshield and side window
demist outlets. Use Defrost mode with maximum
temperature settings for best windshield and side
window defrosting and defogging. When the defrost
mode is selected, the blower level may increase.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399
Information Provided by:
12. Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for cooler temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button
Provides the driver with independent temperature con-
trol. Push the button for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
NOTE:
•If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,
select Defrost mode and increase blower speed.
•If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-
mance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
when MAX A/C is ON.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the
selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
selected. Push the button a second time to turn off the
Recirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401
Information Provided by:
NOTE: In cold weather, use of recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
feature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual
Climate Controls, the Recirculation mode is not allowed
in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Press the AUTO button on the faceplate or the AUTO
button on the touchscreen on the Automatic Tempera-
ture Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pas-
senger temperature control buttons. Once the desired
temperature is displayed, the system will achieve and
automatically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the settings. You will experi-
ence the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the
system to function automatically.
402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•
It is not necessary to move the temperature settings. The
system automatically adjusts the temperature, mode, and
blower speed to provide comfort as quickly as possible.
•The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the US/M customer-programmable
feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in
this section of the manual.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-
trol.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
NOTE:
Each of these features operates independently from
each other. If any feature is controlled manually, tempera-
ture control will continue to operate automatically.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403
Information Provided by:
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather condi-
tions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-
sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-12106 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side win-
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side win-
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
but rainy or humid weather.
404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
•Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automati-
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instruc-
tions.
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405
Information Provided by:
Operating Tips Chart
406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Information Provided by:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
!STARTING PROCEDURES ...............411
▫Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......411
▫Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....412
▫Keyless Enter-N-Go™ ..................412
▫Normal Starting.......................412
▫Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or
−29°C) .............................414
▫Extended Park Starting..................414
▫If Engine Fails To Start .................415
▫After Starting ........................416
▫Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped . . .416
!ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .416
!MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .417
▫Shifting.............................418
▫Downshifting ........................419
!AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED .........................421
▫Key Ignition Park Interlock...............423
▫Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .424
5
Information Provided by:
▫Six-Speed Automatic Transmission
(1.4L Turbo Engine Only — DDCT) .........424
▫Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
2.4L Engine Only — 6F24) ...............435
!AUTOSTICK® .........................443
▫Operation ...........................443
!DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES .........445
▫Acceleration .........................445
▫Traction ............................445
!DRIVING THROUGH WATER .............446
▫Flowing/Rising Water ..................446
▫Shallow Standing Water .................446
!PARKING BRAKE ......................448
!BRAKE SYSTEM .......................450
!POWER STEERING .....................451
!ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .452
▫Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ............453
▫Brake Assist System (BAS) ...............455
▫Traction Control System (TCS) ............456
▫Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..........456
▫Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..............457
▫Hill Start Assist (HSA) .................458
▫Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ..........461
!TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION .............465
▫Tire Markings ........................465
▫Tire Identification Number (TIN)...........468
▫Tire Terminology And Definitions ..........470
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
▫Tire Loading And Tire Pressure ...........471
!TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION ........476
▫Tire Pressure ........................476
▫Tire Inflation Pressures .................478
▫Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .479
▫Radial Ply Tires ......................479
▫Tire Types ...........................480
▫Run Flat Tires — If Equipped .............482
▫Spare Tires — If Equipped ...............482
▫Tire Spinning ........................485
▫Tread Wear Indicators ..................485
▫Life Of Tire .........................486
▫Replacement Tires .....................487
!TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) .......488
!TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS .....490
!TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) ..............................491
▫Base System .........................494
▫Premium System — If Equipped ...........497
▫General Information ...................500
!FUEL REQUIREMENTS ..................500
▫1.4L Turbo Engine .....................500
▫2.0L And 2.4L Engine ...................500
▫Reformulated Gasoline .................501
▫Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ..............501
▫E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles .......502
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
Information Provided by:
▫MMT In Gasoline .....................503
▫Materials Added To Fuel ................503
▫Fuel System Cautions...................503
▫Carbon Monoxide Warnings .............504
!ADDING FUEL ........................505
▫Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...............505
!VEHICLE LOADING ....................508
▫Vehicle Certification Label ...............508
!TRAILER TOWING .....................510
▫Common Towing Definitions .............510
▫Trailer Hitch Classification ...............513
▫Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) ......................514
▫Trailer And Tongue Weight ..............515
▫Towing Requirements ..................516
▫Towing Tips .........................521
!RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) ...................523
▫Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle .............................523
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
•Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-
dren should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
•The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
Information Provided by:
•If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is
locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve
pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the
key.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Depress the
brake pedal before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to oper-
ate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is in
the passenger compartment.
Normal Starting
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, push the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine
is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator
pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. Place the shift lever/gear selector in PARK, then press
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
3. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK, the
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
seconds or three short presses in a row with the
vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine
will shut off. The ignition switch position will remain
in the ACC position until the shift lever/gear selector
is in PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
position. If the shift lever/gear selector is not in PARK
and the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed
once, the EVIC/DID will display a “Vehicle Not In
Park” message and the engine will remain running.
Never leave a vehicle out of the PARK position, or it
could roll.
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
OFF position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
Information Provided by:
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an
ignition switch. It has four positions, OFF, ACC, RUN
and START. To change the ignition positions without
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps:
•Starting with the ignition in the OFF position,
•Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to place
the ignition to the ACC position (EVIC/DID will
display “ACC”),
•Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to place the ignition to the RUN position (EVIC/DID
will display “ON/RUN”),
•Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to
return the ignition to the OFF position (EVIC/DID will
display “OFF”).
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting under extreme cold conditions
an externally powered electric block heater (available
from your authorized dealer) is required for the 1.4L
Turbo engine below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine
below -29°F (-34°C) and is recommended for the 2.0L
engine and 2.4L engine below -20°F (-29°C).
Extended Park Starting
NOTE: Extended Park condition occurs when the vehicle
has not been started or driven for at least 35 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables to the battery
to ensure a full battery charge during the crank cycle.
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
2. Cycle the ignition in the START position and release it
when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within ten seconds, cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position, wait five
seconds to allow the starter to cool, then repeat the
Extended Park Starting procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after eight attempts, allow
the starter to cool for at least 10 minutes, then repeat
the procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time.
Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
#Normal Starting#or #Extreme Cold Weather#procedure,
and has not experienced an extended park condition as
identified in #Extended Park Starting#procedure it may
be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not continuously
crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time.
Wait 60 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
Turbocharger “Cool Down” — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an after-run pump to cool
the turbocharger after the engine is shut off. Depending
on the type of driving and the amount of cargo, the pump
will run for up to 10 minutes after the engine has been
shut off to circulate coolant through the turbocharger.
Although the pump is rubber-mounted for quiet opera-
tion, it is normal to hear it running during this time.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and permits
quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet
with a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater is required for 1.4L Turbo engine
below -20°F (-29°C) and for the 2.4L engine below -29°F
(-34°C). It is recommended for the 2.0L engine and 2.4L
engine below -20°F (-29°C).
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood,
behind to the driver’s side headlamp. Follow the steps
below to properly use the engine block heater:
1. Locate the engine block heater cord (behind the driv-
er’s side headlamp).
2. Undo the Velcro strap that secures the heater cord in
place.
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
3. Pull the cord to the front of the vehicle and plug it into
a grounded, three-wire extension cord.
4. After the vehicle is running, reattach the cord to the
Velcro strap and properly stow away behind the
driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
•The engine block heater cord is a factory installed
option. If your vehicle is not equipped, heater cords
are available from your authorized MOPAR® dealer.
•The engine block heater will require 110 Volts AC and
6.5 Amps to activate the heater element.
•The engine block heater must be plugged in at least
one hour to have an adequate warming effect on the
engine.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should al-
ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch.
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in-
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
warms up. This is normal.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting from a
standing position.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both
fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as
listed in recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift
speeds may not apply.
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
All Engines Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)
Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving down
steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time
provides better acceleration when you desire to resume
speed. Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip, and the vehicle could skid.
CAUTION!
•Skipping gears and downshifting into lower gears
at higher vehicle speeds can damage the engine
and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift into lower
gear with clutch pedal depressed may result dam-
age to the clutch system. Shifting into lower gear
and releasing the clutch may result in engine
damage.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•When descending a hill, be very careful to down-
shift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the
engine which can cause engine damage, and/or
clutch damage, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
If transfer case is in low range the vehicle speeds to
cause engine and clutch damage are significantly
lower.
•Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine damage
and/or damage the clutch, even if the clutch pedal
is pressed.
•Descending a hill in low range with clutch pedal
depressed could result in clutch damage
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended down-
shifting speeds may cause the engine to overspeed
and/or damage the clutch disc, even if the clutch
pedal is pressed.
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum
Speed
80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift
at too high of a vehicle speed, these conditions may
cause the engine to overspeed if too low of a gear is
selected and the clutch pedal is released. Damage to
the clutch and the transmission can result from
skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting
at too high of a vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal
is held pressed (i.e., not released).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-
ing precautions are not observed:
•Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
•Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
•Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
Information Provided by:
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key re-
moval) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go ™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF (key removal) position. The Key Fob can only be
removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the
LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in
PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF
position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
Key Fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until
you obtain service.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Information Provided by:
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (1.4L Turbo
Engine Only — DDCT)
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear
range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock
button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem” in this section). To drive, press the lock button on
the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
This transmission is programmed to prevent shifting
from REVERSE to DRIVE or DRIVE to REVERSE, if
vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h). This safety
feature helps protect your transmission from damage.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® (+/-) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
information). Toggling the shift lever rearward (+) or
forward (-) while in the AutoStick® position (beside the
DRIVE position) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the instrument
cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed for-
ward) it is probably in the AutoStick® (+/-) position
(beside the DRIVE position). In AutoStick® mode, the
transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the shift lever to the right (into
the DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK, REVERSE,
and NEUTRAL.
Shift Lever
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
Information Provided by:
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key re-
moval) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children) and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
•Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
•When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
•Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
•With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
Information Provided by:
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
To maximize fuel economy, the Dual Dry Clutch trans-
mission uses a geartrain arrangement similar to a manual
transmission. Therefore, you should become familiar
with some of the normal operational characteristics of
this transmission:
•During low-speed driving conditions in first gear,
vehicle momentum changes may feel exaggerated in
response to changes in accelerator pedal position. This
behavior is normal and is similar to vehicles equipped
with a manual transmission.
•At low speeds you may hear mechanical noises similar
to a manual transmission as the transmission changes
gears. These noises are normal and will not damage
the transmission.
•Very aggressive driving may result in some clutch
odor similar to a manual transmission. An active
warning message will display in the Instrument Clus-
ter if cool down actions are needed.
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
•When stopped on an incline, always use the brakes to
hold the vehicle in place. On steep inclines, Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will temporarily hold the car in position
when the brake pedal is released. If the accelerator
pedal is not applied after a short time, the car will roll
back. Either reapply the brake (to hold the vehicle) or
press the accelerator to climb the hill.
•Before and after the engine is started, you may hear a
hydraulic pump for a short period of time. This noise
is normal and will not damage the transmission.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, or traveling into strong head
winds), use the AutoStick® shift control (refer to
“AutoStick®” in this section for further information) to
select a lower gear. Under these conditions, using a lower
gear will improve performance and extend transmission
life by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures, the transmission
will not operate if the oil temperature is -22°F (-30°C) or
below. Allow the engine to idle briefly with the transmis-
sion in PARK in order to warm the fluid. Normal
operation will resume once the transmission temperature
has risen to a suitable level.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Information Provided by:
Instrument Cluster Messages
Messages will be displayed in the instrument cluster to
alert the driver when certain unusual conditions occur.
These messages are described below.
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
GEAR NOT AVAILABLE In AutoStick® mode, the gear selected by the driver is not available due to a fault
condition. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and service.
SHIFT NOT ALLOWED The gear position requested by the driver is currently blocked. This occurs if: RE-
VERSE is requested while moving (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), if DRIVE is re-
quested while moving backwards (at 6 mph [10 km/h] or faster), or if (in
AutoStick® mode) a DOWNSHIFT is requested while in 1st gear, 3rd gear or
higher is requested at a stop, or a requested shift would cause engine lugging or
overspeed. Make sure the vehicle is stopped before engaging DRIVE or REVERSE.
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
SHIFT TO NEUTRAL –
THEN D or R
The transmission has shifted itself into NEUTRAL (due to a fault condition, or over-
heat due to excessive idling when stopped in DRIVE with the brakes released), but
the shift lever remains in gear. Shift into NEUTRAL and then back into gear for con-
tinued driving. If the transmission will not re-engage, see your authorized dealer.
AUTOSTICK NOT
AVAILABLE
AutoStick® mode is unavailable due to a shift lever fault. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
AUTOMATIC MODE
NOT AVAILABLE
The transmission is unable to shift itself automatically, due to a fault condition. Use
the AutoStick® mode to shift the transmission manually. See your authorized
dealer for diagnosis and service.
REDUCE GEAR
CHANGES
The transmission pump is overheating. In AutoStick® mode, try to drive in one spe-
cific gear as much as possible, avoiding frequent gear changes. In DRIVE, the trans-
mission will automatically modify its shift schedule to reduce the number of shifts.
TRANS. GETTING HOT
PRESS BRAKE
The transmission driving clutch is overheating, usually due to repeated launches in
stop-and-go traffic. Pull over and allow the transmission to cool in NEUTRAL until
“TRANS. COOL READY TO DRIVE” is displayed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Information Provided by:
MESSAGE DESCRIPTION
TRANS. HOT STOP
SAFELY SHIFT TO P
The transmission driving clutch has overheated. Pull over, shift the transmission
into PARK, and allow the vehicle to cool until “TRANS. COOL READY TO
DRIVE” is displayed.
SERVICE TRANSMIS-
SION
A transmission fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis
and service.
SERVICE SHIFTER A shift lever fault has been detected. See your authorized dealer for diagnosis and
service.
ENGAGE PARK BRAKE The sensor that confirms PARK engagement is not functioning properly. Engage the
parking brake to ensure that the vehicle will not roll when in PARK.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, some gears will be
unavailable. The transmission will operate only in a
certain select set of gears (such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, and
Reverse, or 1st, 3rd, 5th, and Reverse, or 2nd, 4th, and 6th
[with no Reverse]). PARK and NEUTRAL will continue
to be available. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle
to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
2.4L Engine Only — 6F24)
The transmission gear position display (located in the
instrument panel cluster) indicates the transmission gear
range. You must press the brake pedal and the lock
button on the shift lever to move the shift lever out of
PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-
tem” in this section). To drive, press the lock button on
the front of the shift lever and move the shift lever from
PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
Information Provided by:
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU-
TRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick® (+/-) shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick® shift control (refer
to “AutoStick®” in this section for further information).
Toggling the shift lever rearward (+) or forward (-) while in
the AutoStick® position (beside the DRIVE position) will
manually select the transmission gear, and will display the
current gear in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.
NOTE:
If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward)
it is probably in the AutoStick® (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick® mode, the transmission
gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D]
position) for access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-
cult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key re-
moval) position, the transmission is locked in
PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
•When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, (or
in a location accessible to children) and do not
leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
position. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
•DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-
tion:
•When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
•Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position.
•With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-
shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,
third, and fourth gears, direct fifth gear and overdrive
sixth gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-
ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-
tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick® shift
control (refer to “AutoStick®” in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these condi-
tions, using a lower gear will improve performance and
extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
and heat buildup.
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-
ing limits, the transmission controller will modify the
transmission shift schedule and expand the range of
torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
transmission becomes extremely hot, the “Transmission
Temperature Warning Light” may illuminate and the
transmission may operate differently until the transmis-
sion cools down.
During very cold temperatures (-4°F [-20°C] or below),
transmission operation may be modified depending on
engine and transmission temperature as well as vehicle
speed. Normal operation will resume once the transmis-
sion temperature has risen to a suitable level.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains
in fourth gear regardless of which forward gear is
selected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue
to operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-
aging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 441
Information Provided by:
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-
mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Overdrive Operation
The automatic transmission includes an electronically
controlled Overdrive (sixth gear). The transmission will
automatically shift into Overdrive if the following con-
ditions are present:
•The shift lever is in the DRIVE position.
•The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-
perature.
•The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-
ture.
•Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.
•The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been
included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.
A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-
cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal operation in
the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during
some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
442 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Engagement of the torque converter clutch is
inhibited at very cold temperatures. Because the engine
speed is higher when the torque converter clutch is not
engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting
into Overdrive when cold. This is normal. The torque
converter clutch will function normally once the trans-
mission is sufficiently warm.
AUTOSTICK®
AutoStick® is a driver-interactive transmission feature
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick® allows you to maximize en-
gine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and down-
shifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control during
passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain
driving, and many other situations.
Operation
When the shift lever is in the AutoStick® position (beside
the DRIVE position), it can be moved forward and
rearward. This allows the driver to manually select the
transmission gear being used. Moving the shift lever
forward (-) triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the instrument
cluster. In AutoStick® mode, the transmission will only
shift up or down when the driver moves the shift lever
rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or
overspeed condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift is cho-
sen, except as described below.
•For all models except GT, the transmission will auto-
matically upshift when necessary to prevent engine
over-speed.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 443
Information Provided by:
•For GT models, the transmission will remain in the
selected gear even when maximum engine speed is
reached. The transmission will upshift only when
commanded by the driver. Engine overspeed protec-
tion is provided by the engine controls.
•The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
vehicle is accelerated.
•With 2.0L or 2.4L engine, you can start out, from a stop,
in first or second gear. Tapping (+) (at a stop) will
allow starting in second gear. Starting out in second
gear is helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
•If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
•
Avoid using speed control when AutoStick® is engaged.
•Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick® is engaged.
•If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to automatic shift mode and
remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
•If the system detects a problem, it will disable
AutoStick® mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
To disengage AutoStick® mode, return the shift lever to
the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of the
AutoStick® position at any time without taking your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
444 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
when there is a difference in the surface traction under
the front (driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 445
Information Provided by:
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or across a road or path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-
ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
•Driving through standing water limits your vehi-
cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-
ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
•Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-
sengers, and others around you.
446 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
•Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
•Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-
mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-
nated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
•Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 447
Information Provided by:
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
NOTE:
•When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
•This light only shows that the parking brake is ap-
plied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
Parking Brake
448 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission, apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mecha-
nism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out
of PARK. The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
•Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-
ment and possible injury or damage.
•When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
•Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
•Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 449
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-
ing your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will
be some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be
evident by increased pedal travel during application and
greater pedal force required to slow or stop the vehicle. In
addition, if the malfunction is caused by a leak in the
hydraulic system, the “Brake Warning Light” will turn on
as the brake fluid level drops in the master cylinder.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (i.e.,
repeated brake applications with the engine OFF) the
brakes will still function. However, the effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
450 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnor-
mally high brake temperatures, excessive lining
wear, and possible brake damage. You would not
have your full braking capacity in an emergency.
•Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light”
on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking
performance or vehicle stability during braking
may occur. It will take you longer to stop the
vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control.
You could have a collision. Have the vehicle
checked immediately.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
reduces assist or prevents the vehicle from providing
assist, you will still have the ability to steer the vehicle
manually.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be
obtained as soon as possible.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 451
Information Provided by:
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING#OR
#POWER STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE
SYSTEM” message and a steering wheel icon
are displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indi-
cates that the vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for
service. It is likely the vehicle has lost power steering
assistance. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC) or #Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT - PERFOR-
MANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and an icon are
displayed on the EVIC/DID screen, it indicates that
extreme steering maneuvers may have occurred, which
caused an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering assistance
momentarily until the over temperature condition no
longer exists. Once driving conditions are safe, then pull
over and let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information
(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
•Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
•If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system. This system includes Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Traction
Control System (TCS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM),
Trailer Sway Control (TCS), Hill Start Assist (HSA), Brake
Lock Differential (BLD), and Electronic Stability Control
452 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
(ESC). These systems work together to enhance both
vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-
tions.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
vehicle stability and brake performance under most
braking conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, reduces stop distance, and enhances vehicle
control during stop.
When the vehicle is driven over 6 mph (10 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system per-
forming its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 6 mph (10 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can in-
clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into anti-lock:
•The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop).
•The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
•Brake pedal pulsations.
•A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 453
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-
ment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output
radio transmitting equipment. This interference
can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-
bility. Installation of such equipment should be
performed by qualified professionals.
•Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
•The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
•The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
454 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” moni-
tors the ABS. The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake System Warn-
ing Light” is not on.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as
possible.
If both the “Brake System Warning Light” and the “ABS
Warning Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sens-
ing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
ABS. Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best
BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system, you
must apply continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer
desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is
deactivated.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 455
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
prevent accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip
differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than
the other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied
to the wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains
active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” mode.
Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this
section for more information.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then
applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
456 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It cannot
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-
tions, and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-
sively swaying trailer. TSC activates automatically once
the excessively swaying trailer is recognized. When TSC
is functioning, the “ESC Light” will flash, the engine
power will be reduced, and you will feel the brake being
applied to individual wheels in an attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying.
NOTE: The TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in
the “Partial Off” mode.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 457
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
tongue weight recommendations. Refer to ”Vehicle
Loading” and “Trailer Towing” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
•If TSC activates while towing a trailer, stop the
vehicle at the nearest safe location and adjust the
trailer load to eliminate the trailer sway.
•Failure to follow these warnings can result in an
accident or serious personal injury.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to the
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
Hill Start Assist Disable Procedure
NOTE: Vehicle roll back mitigation will not be present
with this feature disabled.
Hill Start assist can be disabled if desired. This procedure
applies to vehicles equipped with a manual or Powertech
transmission.
1. Wheels must be pointed straight ahead, on a level
surface.
2. Automatic transmission should be in PARK.
3. Place manual transmission in NEUTRAL if equipped.
4. Begin with the ignition OFF.
458 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
5. Engage park brake.
6. Start engine and wait for ESC OFF lamp to turn off.
7. Apply brake pedal.
8. Turn steering wheel 200 degrees counter clockwise,
just over half a turn from center position. Press the
“ESC off” button four times.
9. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and continue
in a clockwise direction until 200 degrees past center.
10. Turn the ignition to OFF position.
11. If procedure was done correctly, ESC malfunction
lamp will flash four times after engine starts.
12. Procedure must be completed within 90 seconds.
13. Repeat the condition to re-enable Hill Start Assist
(HSA).
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
•Vehicle must be stopped.
•Vehicle must be on a 3% (manual transmission), 3.5%
(automated manual transmission), or 8% grade or
greater (automatic transmission) hill.
•Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back-
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE and all forward gears when
the activation criteria have been met. The system will not
activate if the vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL or PARK.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 459
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for brak-
ing the vehicle.
Towing With HSA
HSA will provide assistance when starting on a grade
when pulling a trailer.
WARNING!
•If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, your trailer brakes may be activated and
deactivated with the brake switch. If so, when the
brake pedal is released there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold the vehicle and trailer on a
hill and this could cause a collision with another
vehicle or object behind you. In order to avoid
rolling down the hill while resuming acceleration,
manually activate the trailer brake prior to releas-
ing the brake pedal. Always remember the driver is
responsible for braking the vehicle.
•HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.
Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.
(Continued)
460 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Failure to follow these warnings may cause the
vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide
with another vehicle, object or person, and cause
serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the
parking brake while parking on a hill and that the
driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
NOTE: The HSA system may also be turned on and off
if the vehicle is equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display
(DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-
rects for over-steering and under-steering the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to help the vehicle maintain
the desired path.
ESC reduces engine torque and applies brake pressure to
select individual wheels to mitigate vehicle under-steer
and vehicle over-steer. The system uses engine torque
reduction along with individual wheel brake pressure to
correct under-steer and over-steer conditions.
•Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
•Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 461
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro-
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive,
and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The capa-
bilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever the
vehicle is started the system will be in this mode. This
mode should be used for most driving situations. ESC
should only be turned to “Partial Off” for specific reasons
as noted. Refer to “Partial Off” for additional information.
Partial Off
The “ESC Off” button is located in the switch bank above
the climate control. To enter the “Partial Off” mode,
momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the “ESC
Off Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” button and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off. This will restore
the normal “ESC On” mode of operation.
462 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•When in %Partial Off%mode, the TCS functionality
of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature de-
scribed in the TCS section), has been disabled and
the %ESC Off Indicator Light%will be illuminated.
When in %Partial Off%mode, the engine power
reduction feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC sys-
tem is reduced.
•Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when the
ESC system is in the %Partial Off%mode.
NOTE: When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to
allow more wheel spin when starting off in snow, mud,
sand, gravel, or when using tire chains. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pressing the “ESC off”
button to enter partial mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome, turn
ESC back on by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off”
button. This may be done while the vehicle is in motion
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
running. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” will flash to indicate the system is actively cor-
recting an undesirable vehicle condition. This includes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 463
Information Provided by:
Yaw control, traction control, and trailer sway control. If
the lamp remains solid under normal driving conditions,
your vehicle should be serviced at an authorized dealer.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC
system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) or trailer
sway is active. If the “ESC Activation/ Malfunction
Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road conditions.
NOTE:
•The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on mo-
mentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
•Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
•The ESC system may make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
ESC Off Indicator Light
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off.
In some cases, when accelerating from stop on steep
grades, it may be beneficial to turn off ESC. Once the
grade ascent is complete, ESC can be turned on again.
464 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
•P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
•European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter #P#is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
•LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
1—U.S.DOTSafetyStandards
Code (TIN)
4—MaximumLoad
2—SizeDesignation 5—MaximumPressure
3 — Service Description 6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 465
Information Provided by:
•Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
•High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P= Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
%....blank....%= Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
466 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
EXAMPLE:
R= Construction code
–#R#means radial construction, or
–#D#means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H= Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 467
Information Provided by:
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
•
LL = Light load tire or
•
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
468 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 469
Information Provided by:
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-
cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
470 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 471
Information Provided by:
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
472 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 473
Information Provided by:
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
650 lbs [295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
NOTE:
•If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
•For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
474 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 475
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
•Safety and Vehicle Stability
•Economy
•Tread Wear
•Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
•Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
•Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can re-
sult in overheating and tire failure.
•Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
•Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect ve-
hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
476 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-
lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
•Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
•Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
•Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
•Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-
mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the
need for earlier tire replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 477
Information Provided by:
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side door.
At least once a month:
•Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires
may look properly inflated even when they are under-
inflated.
•Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
(1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum
inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
478 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
combine them with other types of tires.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 479
Information Provided by:
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
•The tire has not been driven on when flat.
•The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
•The puncture is no greater than ¼#(6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and
additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-
diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be-
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
480 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi-
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and
handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 481
Information Provided by:
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-
hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles
(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation
pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the
Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited
driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-
ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full
capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat
mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-
mation.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.
Damage to the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original
482 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 483
Information Provided by:
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. In-
stallation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the
driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it
on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
484 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-
one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-
ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
1—WornTire
2—NewTire
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 485
Information Provided by:
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16” (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced. Refer
to “Replacement Tires” in this section for further infor-
mation.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
•Driving style
•Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
•Distance driven
•Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
486 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-
ample found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 487
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-
pension dimensions and performance characteris-
tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-
able handling and stress to steering and suspen-
sion components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
•Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body
clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard
against damage.
•Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as
recommended by the traction device manufacturer
488 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
•Install on Front Tires
•Due to limited clearance,
•For a 205/55R16 the 12 mm Diamond Tire Chain with
Ratchet Tensioning Device from
tirechain.com is rec-
ommended.
•For a 225/45R17 either the Peerless Auto-Trac or Thule
CG-9 snow chain is recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)
between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable
handling. You could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the
following precautions:
•Because of restricted traction device clearance be-
tween tires and other suspension components, it is
important that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove
the damaged parts of the device before further use.
•Install device as tightly as possible and then re-
tighten after driving about ½mile (0.8 km).
•Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large
bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
•Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-
ment.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 489
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-
tions on the method of installation, operating
speed, and conditions for use. Always use the
suggested operating speed of the device manufac-
turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
•Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
reversed.
490 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-
mended cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
psi (7.0 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
“cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 491
Information Provided by:
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres-
sure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-
ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
492 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system op-
eration or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-
market tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have
your sensor function checked.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring Sensor.
NOTE:
•The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
•The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
•Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 493
Information Provided by:
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
•The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
•Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module.
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
494 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster, a #LOW TIRE PRESSURE#
message and “Inflate Tire to XX” message will be dis-
played for a minimum of five seconds, and an audible
chime will be activated when one or more of the four
active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The recommended cold placard pressure value is
the pressure value in the #Inflate Tire to XX#message
displayed in the EVIC/DID. The system will automati-
cally update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish and the #LOW TIRE PRESSURE#and “Inflate
Tire to XX” messages will turn off once the updated tire
pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
Service TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime and display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mes-
sage for a minimum of five seconds. If the ignition key is
cycled, this sequence will repeat providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer
exists. A system fault can occur with any of the following
scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 495
Information Provided by:
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
and #LOW TIRE PRESSURE#and “Inflate Tire to XX”
messages will still turn ON due to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid and a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message will be displayed for a mini-
mum of five seconds.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid and a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message will be
displayed for a minimum of five seconds.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
496 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev-
els. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
•Receiver Module
•Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
•Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)
•Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a “Inflate Tire to
XX” message for a minimum of five seconds and a
graphic of the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s)
displayed in a different color. The recommended cold
placard pressure inflation value is the pressure value
displayed in the #Inflate Tire to XX#message displayed in
the EVIC/DID.
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all tires that are in a different color on the
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 497
Information Provided by:
graphic display to the vehicle’s recommended cold plac-
ard pressure value. The system will automatically up-
date, the “Inflate Tire to XX” message will no longer be
displayed, the graphic display of the pressure value(s)
will return to their normal color, and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire
pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)
to receive this information.
Service TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and then remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This
text message is then followed by a graphic display, with
“- -“ in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which
Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
message will not be present, and a pressure value will be
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
498 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moni-
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn-
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “Inflate Tire
to XX” message and the graphic with the low tire
pressure in a different color will be displayed.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
message for a minimum of five seconds and then
display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid, the EVIC/DID will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
values.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 499
Information Provided by:
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
•This device may not cause harmful interference.
•This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired op-
eration.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States KR55WY9012
Canada 7812D-5WY9012
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
1.4L Turbo Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide satisfactory
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded #regular#gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87. For
optimum performance and fuel economy the use of 91
octane or higher is recommended.
2.0L And 2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emis-
sions regulations and provide excellent
fuel economy and performance when us-
ing high-quality unleaded “regular” gaso-
line having an octane rating of 87.
500 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi-
ence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World-
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recom-
mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speci-
fications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as Ethanol.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gaso-
line containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability prob-
lems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 501
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illumi-
nate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel (FFV) vehicles are compatible with gaso-
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
•Operate in a lean mode
•OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
•Poor engine performance
•Poor cold start and cold driveability
•Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
•Change the engine oil and oil filter
•Disconnect and reconnect the battery
•Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
502 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
and California reformulated gasoline.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
•The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine perfor-
mance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 503
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-
vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
•The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
504 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-
tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
•Keep the trunk closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The fuel filler cap is located behind the fuel filler door, on
the passenger side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is
lost or damaged, be sure the replacement fuel filler cap
has been designed for use with this vehicle.
1. Place the vehicle in PARK (P) position and switch the
ignition LOCK/OFF.
2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel filler door and
release to open.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 505
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the fuel filler cap and hang cap by tether on
fill door to prevent damage to body side.
NOTE: In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the
fuel door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push on the
fuel door around the entire perimeter to break the ice
buildup and re-open the door.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel, remove the fuel
filler nozzle and replace the fuel filler cap.
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the center-rear edge
of the fuel filler door and then release. The fuel door
will close.
Fuel Filler Door and Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
1 — Fuel Filler Door Actuator
2 — Fuel Filler Cap Tether Hook
506 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
filler cap. A poorly fitting cap could let impurities
into the fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting aftermar-
ket cap can cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors escaping
from the system.
•A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the MIL to
turn on.
•To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
•Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
•Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regula-
tions and may cause the malfunction indicator light
to turn on.
•A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
•When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 507
Information Provided by:
•Tighten the gas cap about one-quarter turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that the cap is
properly tightened.
•If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the
vehicle is refueled.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
•Name of manufacturer
•Month and year of manufacture
•Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Type of Vehicle
•Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
508 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight values are
determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial
scale before any occupants or cargo are added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension compo-
nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 509
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,
follow the requirements and recommendations in this
manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-
porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its #loaded and
ready for operation#condition. The recommended way to
510 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either the front
or rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certi-
fication Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. The recommended tongue weight
is 10% to 15% for a conventional hitch. You must consider
this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 511
Information Provided by:
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and medium-
sized trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s direc-
tions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control and thereby en-
hancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds, contributing positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on Vehicle and Trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR require-
ments.
512 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy
Duty
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 513
Information Provided by:
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
1.4L Turbo Engine
Trailer towing is not recommended.
Engine/Transmission Frontal Area Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Max. Tongue Wt. (See
Note)
2.0L and 2.4L Auto/
Man
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m) 1,000 lbs (450 kg) 150 lbs (50 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo
and should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
514 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely from side-to-side which will cause loss of con-
trol of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
•The tongue weight of the trailer.
•The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 515
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
Placard” in “Tire Safety Information” for the maximum
combined weight of occupants and cargo for your ve-
hicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-
train components, the following guidelines are recom-
mended:
CAUTION!
•Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
•Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the Maintenance
Schedule. Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
GAWR or GCWR ratings.
516 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
•Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
•When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-
age to the brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steer-
ing, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
•Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. With a manual transmis-
sion, shift the transmission into REVERSE. Always
block or %chock%the trailer wheels.
•GCWR must not be exceeded.
(Continued)
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 517
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-
lized.
Towing Requirements — Tires
•Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
•Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and Oper-
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
•Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-
sures before trailer usage.
•Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
proper inspection procedure.
•When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for proper tire
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
518 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
•Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
•An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
•Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
WARNING!
•
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hy-
draulic brake lines. It can overload your brake sys-
tem and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have a collision.
•
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis-
tance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in a collision.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 519
Information Provided by:
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four-pin and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer
harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
1 — Female Pins 4 — Park
2 — Male Pin 5 — Left Stop/Turn
3—Ground 6—RightStop/Turn
520 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. How-
ever, if frequent shifting occurs while in DRIVE, use the
AutoStick® shift control to manually select a lower gear.
NOTE: Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve perfor-
mance and extend transmission life by reducing exces-
sive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
1—Battery 5—Ground
2—BackupLamps 6—LeftStop/Turn
3—RightStop/Turn 7—RunningLamps
4 — Electric Brakes
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 521
Information Provided by:
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes
of continuous operation, then change the transmission
fluid and filter as specified for severe usage (police, fleet,
taxi, or frequent trailer towing). Refer to the #Maintenance
Schedule#for the proper maintenance intervals.
AutoStick®
When using the AutoStick® shift control, select the
highest gear that allows for adequate performance and
avoids frequent downshifts. For example, choose #4#if
the desired speed can be maintained. Choose #3#or #2#if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous driving
at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a higher gear or
vehicle speed when grade and road conditions allow.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
•Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
•When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
•Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-
heating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
522 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the
Ground
Manual Transmis-
sion
1.4L Turbo Engine
With Automatic
Transmission
(DDCT)
2.0L/2.4L Engine
With Automatic
Transmission
Flat Tow None Transmission in
NEUTRAL
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
NOT AL-
LOWED
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT AL-
LOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT AL-
LOWED
On Trailer All OK OK OK
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
5
STARTING AND OPERATING 523
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with a manual transmission
or a DDCT transmission (1.4L turbo engine) may be
recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal highway
speed, for any distance, if the transmission is in NEU-
TRAL. For vehicles with DDCT transmission (1.4L turbo
automatic), refer to #Shift Lever Override#in #What to Do
in Emergencies#for instructions on shifting the transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL when the ignition is OFF. If the
ignition is left in the ACC position, it may be helpful to
disconnect the negative battery cable (and secure it away
from the battery post), to avoid draining the battery.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow any 2.0L or 2.4L engine vehicle
equipped with an automatic transmission. Damage
to the drivetrain will result. If these vehicles re-
quire towing, make sure all the wheels are OFF the
ground.
•Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly
can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
524 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information Provided by:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
!HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS ...........527
!IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ............527
!WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ......................528
▫Torque Specifications ..................528
!TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED .........530
▫Tire Service Kit Storage .................530
▫Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .530
▫Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions..........531
▫Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit .........534
!JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ..........539
▫Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage —
If Equipped .........................540
▫Preparations For Jacking ................542
▫Jacking And Changing A Tire .............543
▫Road Tire Installation ...................548
!JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES ...........551
▫Preparations For Jump-Start ..............551
▫Jump-Starting Procedure ................553
!FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE .............555
6
Information Provided by:
!SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE ................556
!TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE ...........559
▫2.0L / 2.4L Automatic Transmission.........560
▫Manual Transmission Or 1.4L Turbo Automatic
(DDCT) Transmission...................561
526 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the
center of the instrument panel.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the switch is activated, all direc-
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
•On the highways — slow down.
•
In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
•If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
•You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 527
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H,”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H,” turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque **Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/
Bolt
Socket
Size
100 Ft-Lbs (135 N·m) M12 x 1.25 19 mm
**Use only Chrysler recommended lug nuts/bolts and
clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
528 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Wheel Mounting Surface Torque Patterns
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 529
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approxi-
mately -4°F (-20°C).
This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
1—SealantBottle 5—ModeSelectKnob
2 — Deflation Button 6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
3—PressureGauge 7—AirPumpHose(Black)
4—PowerButton 8—PowerPlug(locatedonthebot-
tom side of the Tire Service Kit)
530 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
this mode.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
(6) when selecting this mode.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
•Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 531
Information Provided by:
•The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
•When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
•For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
•You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
•Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
532 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
•Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
•A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
•Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 533
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a phy-
sician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth imme-
diately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
in Gear (manual transmission) and turn Off the igni-
tion.
4. Set the parking brake.
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Sealant Mode position.
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
deflated tire.
534 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
valve stem.
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
•Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
Service Kit.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
•After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the
tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within0–10
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before
turning ON the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
use. Call for assistance.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 535
Information Provided by:
NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose (6):
1.
Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer
flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70 seconds).
As the sealant flows through the Sealant Hose (6), the
Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar).
The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immedi-
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
pressure within 15 minutes:
•The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instru-
ment panel.
3.
Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of the
536 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vehicle.”
CAUTION!
•The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
•Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant con-
tacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s inte-
rior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
(D) Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire,
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
(E) After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Mode position.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 537
Information Provided by:
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
and loading information label on the driver-side door
opening.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom-
mended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12
Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replace-
ment”.
NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
538 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
(F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
of it accordingly.
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
•Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
(Continued)
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 539
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
•Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
•The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage — If Equipped
The jack and spare tire are both stowed under an access
cover in the trunk. Follow these steps to access the jack
and spare tire.
1. Open the trunk.
2. Lift the access cover using the pull strap.
540 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the fastener securing the jack and spare tire. 4. Remove the scissors jack and wheel bolt wrench from
the spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to
the left to loosen the wheel bolt wrench, and remove
the wrench from the jack assembly.
5. Remove the spare tire.
Pull Strap Jack Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 541
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery
areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid being hit when operating the jack
or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Set the parking brake.
4. Place the shift lever into PARK.
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite of the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain
in the vehicle when the vehicle is
being jacked.
542 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
Jacking And Changing A Tire
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
•Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
•Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
•Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
•Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
•Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
•Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
•Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
•If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Jack Warning Label
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 543
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt wrench.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
Jacking Locations Removing Jack Handle From Jack
544 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where the center
cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel bolt wrench
to pry the center cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel bolt wrench
to loosen, but not remove, the wheel bolts on the
wheel with the flat tire. Turn the wheel bolts counter-
clockwise one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the notched lift area that is
closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw clockwise to
firmly engage the jack saddle with the lift area of the
sill flange, centering the jack saddle between the
locating notches on the sill flange.
Front Jacking Location
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 545
Information Provided by:
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the flat tire
and install the spare tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
Rear Jacking Location
546 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
NOTE:
•For vehicles so equipped, do not attempt to install a
center cap or wheel cover on the compact spare.
•Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to “Limited-Use
Spare” under “Tires — General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for additional warnings,
cautions, and information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded end of the
wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
Mounting Spare Tire
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 547
Information Provided by:
9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in this section for proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service station.
11. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the
parking brake before driving the vehicle.
12. Stow the jack, tools and flat tire.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire
repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. To ease the installation process for steel wheels with
wheel covers, install two wheel bolts on the wheel
which are on each side of the valve stem. Install the
wheel bolts with the threaded end of the bolt toward
the wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
548 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
3. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand,
snapping the cover over the two wheel bolts. Do not
use a hammer or excessive force to install the cover.
4. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
5. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
6. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem 4 — Wheel Cover
2—ValveNotch 5—RoadWheel
3—Wheelbolt
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 549
Information Provided by:
“Torque Specifications” in this section for proper lug
bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
7. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
8. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the threaded
end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel. Lightly
tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push down on the
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased
leverage. Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until
each wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to
“Torque Specifications” in this section for the proper
lug bolt torque. If in doubt about the correct tightness,
have them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
550 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the wheel
blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assem-
bly and stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the
assembly using the means provided. Release the park-
ing brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel bolt torque
with a torque wrench to ensure that all wheel bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-
started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
precautions.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.
NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the
positive battery post.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 551
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when-
ever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
•Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
•Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-
cal accessories.
Positive Battery Post
552 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 553
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-
cal spark could cause the battery to explode and
could result in personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-
charged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle
you should have the battery and charging system in-
spected at your authorized dealer.
554 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine operation,
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd Gear
and REVERSE (with manual transmission) while gently
pressing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accel-
erator pedal pressure that will maintain the rocking
motion, without spinning the wheels or racing the en-
gine.
NOTE: 1.4L Turbo automatic transmission vehicles can-
not be rocked in this manner, because the transmission
will not allow shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE while
the wheels are turning.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-
gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 555
Information Provided by:
NOTE: Press the #ESC Off#switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in “partial off” mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-
mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the #ESC
Off#switch again to restore #ESC On#mode.
CAUTION!
•When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-
tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-
train damage may result.
•Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-
mission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-
cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
556 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
3. Remove the rubber storage tray liner from the center
console, then lift up the front of the shift lever bezel,
carefully disengage the bezel from the shift lever
housing, and slide it up to the top of the shift lever.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool down into
the access slot at the front of the shift lever assembly,
and push and hold the white override release lever
down.
Shift Lever Bezel
Override Release Tab
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 557
Information Provided by:
6. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position. 7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the shift lever bezel (use care to avoid
pinching the wiring), and the rubber storage tray liner.
Shift Lever
558 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
NOTE: This section describes procedures for towing a
disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The
Ground
2.0L / 2.4L AUTO-
MATIC TRANS-
MISSION
MANUAL TRANS-
MISSION
1.4L TURBO AU-
TOMATIC (DDCT)
TRANSMISSION
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED Transmission in
NEUTRAL
Transmission in
NEUTRAL
Dolly Tow Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL OK BEST METHOD BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 559
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
•When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
•The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
2.0L / 2.4L Automatic Transmission
This vehicle must be towed with all four wheels OFF
the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow any 2.0L or 2.4L vehicle equipped
with an automatic transmission. Damage to the
drivetrain will result. If these vehicles require
towing, make sure all the wheels are OFF the
ground.
•Do not dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a towing dolly
can cause significant damage to your vehicle. Dam-
age from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered un-
der the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
560 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Information Provided by:
If the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
discharged, refer to “Shift Lever Override” in this section
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission
out of PARK for loading onto a flatbed truck.
Manual Transmission Or 1.4L Turbo Automatic
(DDCT) Transmission
•The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
•
Manual transmission and 1.4L turbo automatic (DDCT)
transmission vehicles can also be flat towed (all four
wheels on the ground) with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL. For vehicles with DDCT transmission (1.4L turbo
automatic), refer to #Shift Lever Override#in this section
for instructions on shifting the transmission into NEU-
TRAL when the ignition is OFF. If the ignition is left in
the ACC position, it may be helpful to disconnect the
negative battery cable (and secure it away from the
battery post), to avoid draining the battery.
CAUTION!
•DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition
is related to the clutch, transmission or driveline.
Additional damage to the drivetrain could result.
•Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-
quirements can cause severe engine, transmission,
or drivetrain damage. Damage from improper tow-
ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 561
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
!ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO . . . .565
!ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L ..........566
!ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L ..........567
!ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .568
▫Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ............568
!EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ..........................569
!REPLACEMENT PARTS ..................570
!DEALER SERVICE ......................571
!MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES ...........571
▫Engine Oil ..........................572
▫Engine Oil Filter ......................575
▫Engine Air Cleaner Filter ................575
▫Tires ..............................576
▫Maintenance-Free Battery ...............576
▫Air Conditioner Maintenance .............577
▫A/C Air Filter .......................578
▫Body Lubrication .....................580
▫Windshield Wiper Blades ...............581
▫Adding Washer Fluid ..................581
7
Information Provided by:
▫Exhaust System ......................582
▫Cooling System ......................585
▫Brake System ........................591
▫Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....593
▫Manual Transmission — If Equipped .......595
▫Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion ...........................595
!FUSES ..............................602
▫Interior Fuses ........................602
▫Underhood Fuses......................604
▫Body Control Module (BCM) Fuses .........607
!VEHICLE STORAGE ....................609
!REPLACEMENT BULBS .................609
!BULB REPLACEMENT ..................611
▫Headlamps ..........................611
▫Backup Lamps........................612
▫License Lamp ........................613
!FLUID CAPACITIES ....................615
!FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS ..............................616
▫Engine .............................616
▫Chassis ............................619
564 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 1.4L TURBO
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
2 — Engine Oil Level Indicator 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
3 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Battery
4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 565
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Level Indicator
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
566 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 5 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
2 — Engine Oil Fill 6 — Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 7 — Engine Oil Level Indicator
4 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Air Cleaner Filter
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 567
Information Provided by:
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
•Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
•If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be dis-
played in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a#clicking#sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
568 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-
nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
of a normal bulb check.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 569
Information Provided by:
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
•The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
•The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainte-
nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
570 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-
nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil
penalties being assessed against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If you
have any doubt about your ability to perform a service
job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
•Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-
form repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-
mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 571
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-
vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-
nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone which depicts the MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end of the
range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the reading is at the
low end of the indicated range will result in the oil level
at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
(Continued)
572 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-
tion.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve
months, whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection — 1.4L Turbo Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L And 2.4L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Cer-
tified Grade SN or better and meet the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 1.4L Turbo
Engine
MOPAR® SAE 5W-40 synthetic engine oil or equivalent
Pennzoil® or Shell Helix® is recommended for all oper-
ating temperatures. This engine oil improves low tem-
perature starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine
oil filler cap also states the recommended engine oil
viscosity grade for your engine.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 573
Information Provided by:
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L And 2.4L
Engine
MOPAR® SAE 0W-20 engine oil or equivalent Pennzoil®
or Shell Helix® is recommended for all operating tem-
peratures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad-
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-
tives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
574 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-
mended.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 575
Information Provided by:
Tires
Checking For Tire Wear
Once a month, check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage. Rotate at the first sign of
irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
WARNING!
•Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area imme-
diately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
•Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
•Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
(Continued)
576 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
•It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
•If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
•Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 577
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-
tioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmen-
tal Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning ser-
vice be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
operating or personal injury may result.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet on the
lower right of center console. Perform the following
procedure to replace the filter:
1. Remove the passenger side console closeout. (located
on the right side of the center console).
578 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
2. Disengage the retaining tab that secures the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
3. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of
the housing. Take note of the air filter position indica-
tors.
Passenger Side Console Closeout Filter Cover Retaining Tab
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 579
Information Provided by:
4. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter position
indicators pointing in the same direction as removal.
When installing the filter cover, make sure the retain-
ing tab fully engages the cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
5. Install the passenger side console closeout.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
Air Conditioning Filter Removal
580 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-
nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-
tions of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-
sary.
Adding Washer Fluid
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine
compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 581
Information Provided by:
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
582 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
•A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-
hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-
tact anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
•The catalytic converter requires the use of un-
leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-
mance and cause serious damage to the engine.
•Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 583
Information Provided by:
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-
age:
•Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
•Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
•Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
584 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cooling System
WARNING!
•When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
•You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-
freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 585
Information Provided by:
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains visible
sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and flush with
OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to MS-12106).
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
586 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS-12106) that
allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-
ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-
ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-
ing to MS-12106) throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
•We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12106.
•Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan-
dard MS-12106 and distilled water. Use higher concen-
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
•Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion-
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 587
Information Provided by:
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE:
•Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
•Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze).
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
588 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
•Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-
gine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-
mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is ad-
equate. With the engine off and cold, the level of the
engine coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be be-
tween the “MAX” and “MIN” lines marked on the bottle.
As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfac-
tory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once a
month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 589
Information Provided by:
Points To Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
•Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (anti-
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
expansion bottle must also be protected against freez-
ing.
•If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
for leaks.
•
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
•Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
•Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-
sions.
590 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual trans-
mission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 591
Information Provided by:
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Re-
fer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Main-
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
•Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
•To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or pro-
longed braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
•Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
(Continued)
592 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
•Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transmis-
sion.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality, and will require more
frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to “Fluids,
Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for
fluid specifications.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 593
Information Provided by:
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supple-
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid addi-
tives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may
adversely affect seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-
nents. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunc-
tion, visit your authorized dealer immediately to have
the fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmission dam-
age.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-
rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-
age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
594 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Fluid and Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the
life of the vehicle. However, if the vehicle is used for
frequent trailer towing, police, fleet, taxi, etc., change the
fluid as indicated in the Maintenance Schedule. In addi-
tion, change the fluid (and filter, if equipped) if the fluid
becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-
mission is disassembled for any reason.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
The transmission is designed to be fill for life. The oil
does not need to be check unless there is an oil leak.
Should the transmission be leaking oil, the transmission
should be serviced to correct the condition.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri-
cant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 595
Information Provided by:
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contami-
nants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme condi-
tions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
•Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
•Stone and gravel impact.
•Insects, tree sap and tar.
•Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
•Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in
the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild car wash
soap, and rinse the panels completely with clear water.
•If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
•Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
•Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
596 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
•If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
•It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
•If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
•If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
•If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
•If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
•Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
•All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 597
Information Provided by:
•To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov-
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
this finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s pro-
tective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-
ner:
•Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
•Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
•For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean or
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
598 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
•For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
•Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR® Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean
fabric upholstery and MOPAR® Carpet Cleaner or
equivalent for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR® Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather condi-
tioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 599
Information Provided by:
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-
dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
600 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your ve-
hicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
(Continued)
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 601
Information Provided by:
WARNING! (Continued)
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
FUSES
WARNING!
•
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appro-
priate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as
the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another
fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown
fuse with metal wires or any other material. Failure
to use proper fuses may result in serious personal
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
injury, fire and/or property damage.
•Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
•If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
•If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Interior Fuses
The interior fuses are located on the drivers side under
the instrument panel.
602 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F1 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
F2 – 20 Amp Yellow Rear Heated Seats, Heated Steering Wheel – If
Equipped
F3 – 10 Amp Red Park Assist Module, Rear Camera, Left and
Right Blind Spot Sensor, Compass – If
Equipped
F4 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster
F5 – 10 Amp Red HVAC, Humidity Sensor, In-Car Temperature
Sensor, Inside Mirror Assembly
F18 – 15 Amp Blue Radio
F20 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module, Switch
Bank
F21 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port
F22 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener, EOM
F23 – 20 Amp Yellow Sunroof
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 603
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F24 – 5 Amp Tan Run/Accessory Relay
F25 – 5 Amp Tan Transmission Control Module #4
F26 – 5 Amp Tan Stop Lamp Switch
F27 – 10 Amp Red Pneumatic Lumbar Support
Underhood Fuses
The Power Distribution Center is located on the right side
of the engine compartment, behind the battery.
Power Distribution Center
604 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – Body Control Module #1
F02 60 Amp Blue – Body Control Module #2
F03 30 Amp Green – Output For Starter Relay #1
F04 40 Amp Orange – ESC Pump Motor
F05 40 Amp Orange – Transmission Control Module #1
F06 30 Amp Green – Body Control Module #3
F07 40 Amp Orange – EBL RLY Coil, Blower Motor RLY Coil
F09 – 5 Amp Tan Radiator Fan
F10 – 10 Amp Red ORC
F11 – 20 Amp Yellow Run/Start, Engine Control Module
F14 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module #2
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Transmission Control Module #3
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Engine Control Module, Ignition Coils
F17 – 15 Amp Blue Brake System Module
F18 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 605
Information Provided by:
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F19 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F20 – 30 Amp Green Rear Defroster (EBL)
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F22 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller
F23 – 25 Amp Clear Brake System Module
F24 – 20 Amp Yellow Engine Control Module, Fuel Injectors
F30 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (Console)
F81 60 Amp Blue – Interior PDC Battery Feed, Power Seats
F82 30 Amp Green – Amplifier
F83 40 Amp Orange – HVAC Blower Motor
F84 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F85 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof, LRSM, Power Outlet (Console),
UCI/AUX Port, Cigar Lighter
F86 – 20 Amp Yellow –
606 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Cavity Maxi Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F87 – 10 Amp Red Wastegate, Purge Solenoid, OBD Vent
Valve, Oxygen Sensor Heaters
F88 – 10 Amp Red Heated Outside Mirrors
Body Control Module (BCM) Fuses
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F12 – – Spare
F13 – 15 Amp Blue Left Headlamp
F31 – – Spare
F32 – 10 Amp Red Interior Lighting/Decklid/Liftgate Release
F33 – 25 Amp Clear Window Motor – Driver
F34 – 25 Amp Clear Window Motor – Passenger
F36 – 15 Amp Blue Intrusion Module
F37 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster
F38 – 20 Amp Yellow Door Locks
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 607
Information Provided by:
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F42 – – Spare
F43 – 20 Amp Yellow Windshield Washer Pump
F47 – 5 Amp Tan Transmission Control Module (Tcm)
F48 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown Stop Lamp Switch
F50 – 7.5 Amp Brown Pneumatic Lumbar Support
F51 – 7.5 Amp Brown Cd/Hands-Free Module – Bluetooth/
Radio Display
F53 – 7.5 Amp Brown Driver Window Switch/Power Mirrors
F89 – 5 Amp Tan Trunk Lamp
F90 – 7.5 Amp Brown Front Fog Lamps – Right
F91 – 7.5 Amp Brown Front Fog Lamps – Left
F92 – 7.5 Amp Brown High Beams (Shutters)
F93 – 15 Amp Blue Right Headlamp
608 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days,
you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
•Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
•
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 35 days, an Extended Park Start Procedure is
required to start the vehicle. Refer to “Starting Procedures”
in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Dome Lamp W5W
Overhead Console Lamp W5W
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 609
Information Provided by:
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Halogen Headlamp) HIR2
Low Beam/High Beam (Bi-Xenon Headlamp) D3S **
Front Park/Turn Signal Lamp 7442NALL
Sidemarker Lamp 194
Front Fog Lamp H11
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
Rear Tail/Stop/Turn Signal Lamp LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
Backup Lamp 7440
License Lamp 168
* Lamp is not serviceable. It is a LED lamp. To replace the
LED, the entire assembly must be replaced.
** The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge
tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
610 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
BULB REPLACEMENT
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
accelerate the clearing process.
Headlamps
Halogen Headlamps
Can be serviced by removing the cap from the backside
of the headlamp. Remove the HIR2 bulb from the con-
nector and replacing the bulb. Reinstall bulb and cap.
High Intensity Discharge Headlamps (HID)
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electro-
cution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 611
Information Provided by:
Backup Lamps
1. Open trunk.
2. Remove trim cover.
3. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn counter clock-
wise to remove.
4. Replace bulb.
Trim Cover
Bulb Socket
612 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
5. Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn clockwise to
install.
6. Install trim cover.
License Lamp
1. Remove the screws securing the lamp to the rear
fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
Backup Bulb
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 613
Information Provided by:
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the lamp to the rear fascia, and then install
the screws.
1—LicenseLampBulb
2—Socket
614 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Fuel (1.4L Engines) 13.2 Gallons 50 Liters
Fuel (2.0L/2.4L Engines) 14.2 Gallons 54 Liters
Fuel (2.4L GT models only) 15.8 Gallons 60 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified) 4 Quarts 3.8 Liters
2.0L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
1.4L Turbo Engine (MOPAR® OAT Antifreeze/Engine Cool-
ant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
5.8 Quarts 5.5 Liters
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR® OAT Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
7.2 Quarts 6.8 Liters
* Includes heater and pressurized coolant bottle filled to MAX level.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 615
Information Provided by:
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil,
meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12991 such as
MOPAR®, Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
Engine Oil – 2.0L and 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR®,
Pennzoil®, and Shell Helix®. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct
SAE grade.
616 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended – 87 Octane Acceptable.
Fuel Selection – 2.0L and 2.4L En-
gine
87 Octane.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 617
Information Provided by:
CAUTION!
•Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-
ant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-
gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-
ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS-12106), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
•Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
•This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-
tifreeze) is not recommended.
618 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Information Provided by:
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission (1.4L
Turbo Engine) – If Equipped
Gear Oil: Use only MOPAR® C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Trans-
mission Fluid or equivalent.
Control system: Use only MOPAR® C Series DDCT SAE 75W Hydraulic
Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission.
Automatic Transmission (2.0L And
2.4L Engine) – If Equipped
Use only MOPAR® SP-IV Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of
your transmission
Manual Transmission – If
Equipped
We recommend you use MOPAR® C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch
Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703. If DOT 3, SAE
J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 619
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
!MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE .............622 ▫Required Maintenance ..................623
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Information Provided by:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-
vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will
influence when the “Change Oil” message is displayed.
Severe Operating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km)
since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display
(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-
vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4000 miles (6,500 km) if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environment. This
type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
•Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
622 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake
master cylinder as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Required Maintenance
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for required maintenance.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•Change engine oil and filter.
•Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-
lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
•Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required.
•Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake.
•Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses.
•Inspect exhaust system.
•Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 623
Information Provided by:
Maintenance Chart
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect CV joint boots. X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends and replace
as necessary. XXXX X X X
Inspect brake linings, parking brake function. X X X X X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace the cabin/air conditioning filter. XXXX X X X
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the spark plugs (1.4L Turbo Engine).** X X X X X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
624 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Replace the spark plugs (2.0L and 2.4L Engine).** X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes first. XX
Change the transmission fluid (manual, or 1.4L
turbo automatic) if using your vehicle for any of the
following: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial service), off-road, des-
ert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at
sustained speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C).
XX X
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 625
Information Provided by:
Mileage Or Time Passed (Whichever Comes
First)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter
(2.0L, 2.4L engines only) if you frequently drive: on
rough or unpaved roads, on mountain roads, on
short trips, in heavy city traffic during hot weather,
or while towing a trailer, or if you use the vehicle for
police, taxi, or in a commercial fleet.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo Engine). X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
626 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
•You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
•Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-
hicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 627
Information Provided by:
Information Provided by:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
!SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .......................631
▫Prepare For The Appointment.............631
▫Prepare A List ........................631
▫Be Reasonable With Requests .............631
!IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ..............631
▫Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center.......632
▫Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center ......632
▫In Mexico Contact:.....................633
▫Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)...................633
▫Service Contract ......................633
!WARRANTY INFORMATION .............634
!MOPAR®PARTS.......................635
!REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ............635
▫In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.......................635
▫In Canada...........................635
!PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ............636
9
Information Provided by:
!DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................637
▫Treadwear...........................637
▫Traction Grades .......................637
▫Temperature Grades....................638
630 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 631
Information Provided by:
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed
correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-
solved with this process.
•If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
They want to know if you need assistance.
•If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-
ter should include the following information:
•Owner’s name and address
•Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
•Authorized dealer name
•Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
•Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 423–6343
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
632 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
In Mexico Contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 633
Information Provided by:
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-
vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-
nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
634 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
MOPAR® PARTS
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-
mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle
operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should contact Trans-
port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 635
Information Provided by:
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC ve-
hicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-
quaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and mainte-
nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
636 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
Call toll free at:
•1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
•1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
•
www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-
teristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 637
Information Provided by:
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-
ing, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
638 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Information Provided by:
INDEX
10
Information Provided by:
About Your Brakes ........................450
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) ................453
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............587
Adding Fuel .............................505
Adding Washer Fluid ......................581
Additives, Fuel ...........................503
Airbag.................................62
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag ....................63
Air Bag Components .....................62
Air bag Operation .......................67
Air Bag Warning Light ....................68
Driver Knee Air Bag ......................77
Enhanced Accident Response ................83
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................87
FrontAirBag...........................62
Front Passenger Knee Air bag ...............77
If A Deployment Occurs ...................82
Knee Impact Bolsters .....................77
Lighter Weight Passengers ..................71
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............86
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) ........68
Transporting Pets .......................109
Air bag Deployment ........................62
Air bag Light .............................84
Air bag Maintenance........................86
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .575
Air Conditioner Maintenance .................577
Air Conditioning..........................390
Air Conditioning Controls ...................390
Air Conditioning Filter .....................405
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..............404
Air Conditioning Refrigerant .................577
Air Conditioning System ....................390
Air Pressure, Tires.........................478
Alarm
Arm The System ........................20
Rearming The System .....................20
640 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Tamper Alert ...........................22
Vehicle Security Alarm ....................20
Alarm Light .............................315
Alarm, Panic .............................22
Alarm (Security Alarm) ......................20
Alarm System (Security Alarm) ................20
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle ...............7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..................586
Capacities ............................615
Disposal ..............................589
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................453
Anti-Lock Warning Light ....................318
Appearance Care .........................595
Assistance Towing.........................150
Assist, Hill Start ..........................458
Auto Down Power Windows ..................44
Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................122
Automatic Door Locks ......................36
Automatic Headlights ......................237
Automatic High Beams .....................239
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..........402
Automatic Transmission ....................421
Adding Fluid ..........................594
Fluid and Filter Changes ..................595
Fluid Level Check .......................594
Fluid Type ............................593
Gear Ranges ...........................426
Special Additives .......................594
Autostick ...............................443
Auto Unlock, Doors ........................36
Auto Up Power Windows ....................44
Battery.................................576
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) ........27
Belts, Seat...............................112
Bluetooth®
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing ................176
10
INDEX 641
Information Provided by:
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect® Phone And Mobile Phone .........192
Pair (Link) Uconnect® Phone To A Mobile
Phone ...............................172
Body Mechanism Lubrication .................580
B-Pillar Location ..........................471
Brake Assist System .......................455
Brake Control System, Electronic ..............452
Brake Fluid .............................619
Brake, Parking ...........................448
Brakes .................................450
Brake System ............................450
Anti-Lock (ABS) ........................453
Master Cylinder ........................591
Warning Light .........................312
Brake/Transmission Interlock.................424
Brightness, Interior Lights ...................244
Bulb Replacement .........................609
Bulbs, Light .............................114
Camera, Rear ............................271
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ..........615
Capacities, Fluid ..........................615
Caps, Filler
Fuel .................................505
Oil (Engine) ...........................566
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................588
Carbon Monoxide Warning ..................111
Cargo Area Features .......................295
Cargo Compartment .......................295
Car Washes .............................596
CD (Compact Disc) Player ...................379
Cellular Phone ...........................135
Chains, Tire .............................488
Change Oil Indicator .......................330
Changing A Flat Tire .......................539
Chart, Tire Sizing .........................466
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .318
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ..............110
642 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Checks, Safety............................110
Child Restraint ............................88
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ...........................92
Child Restraints .........................88
Child Seat Installation ....................106
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt .......102
Infants And Child Restraints ................90
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .......95
Older Children And Child Restraints ..........91
Seating Positions ........................94
Child Safety Locks .........................37
Clean Air Gasoline ........................501
Cleaning
Wheels ...............................597
Climate Control ..........................390
Clock..................................367
Clutch .................................591
Clutch Fluid .............................591
Coin Holder .............................293
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance ..............389
Compact Disc (CD) Player ...................379
Compact Spare Tire........................483
Computer, Trip/Travel......................326
Connector
UCI.................................380
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........380
Console, Floor ...........................293
Console, Overhead ........................273
Contract, Service ..........................633
Coolant (Antifreeze) .......................615
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ...........588
Cooling System...........................585
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............587
Coolant Level ..........................585
Disposal of Used Coolant .................589
Drain, Flush, and Refill ...................585
Inspection ............................589
10
INDEX 643
Information Provided by:
Points to Remember .....................590
Pressure Cap ..........................588
Radiator Cap ..........................588
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .............586
Corrosion Protection .......................595
Cruise Light .............................320
Cupholders .............................291
Customer Assistance .......................631
Data Recorder, Event .......................87
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights.............246
Daytime Running Lights ....................240
Dealer Service............................571
Deck Lid, Emergency Release .................48
Deck Lid, Power Release .....................47
Defroster, Rear Window.....................298
Defroster, Windshield ......................112
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ..................247
Diagnostic System, Onboard .................568
Dimmer Switch, Headlight...................243
Dipsticks
Automatic Transmission ..................594
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................589
Door Locks
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors ......37
Door Locks ............................25
KeyFob...............................34
Manual Door Locks ......................34
Power Door Locks .......................35
Remote ...............................34
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................34
Door Locks, Automatic ......................36
Door Opener, Garage.......................275
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ......................227
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water ................................446
644 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Electrical Power Outlets.....................287
Electric Rear Window Defrost.................298
Electric Remote Mirrors .....................124
Electronic Brake Control System ...............452
Brake Assist System .....................455
Electronic Stability Program ................461
Traction Control System ...................456
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) ..............456
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) ........253
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) .............461
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)......271
Emergency Brake .........................448
Emergency Deck Lid Release ..................48
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck ................555
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................527
Jacking ...............................539
Jump Starting ..........................551
Overheating ...........................527
Towing ..............................559
Emergency Trunk Release ....................48
Emission Control System Maintenance ..........569
Engine .................................566
Air Cleaner ...........................575
Block Heater ..........................416
Break-In Recommendations ................109
Checking Oil Level ......................572
Compartment ..........................565
Cooling ..............................585
Exhaust Gas Caution .....................111
Fuel Requirements ......................500
Jump Starting ..........................551
Oil..................................572
Oil Filler Cap ..........................566
Oil Selection ...........................573
Overheating ...........................527
Temperature Gauge ......................310
Enhanced Accident Response Feature ............83
10
INDEX 645
Information Provided by:
Entry System, Illuminated ....................23
Ethanol ................................501
Event Data Recorder ........................87
Exhaust Gas Caution .......................111
Exhaust System...........................111
Exterior Folding Mirrors ....................123
Exterior Lighting..........................236
Exterior Lights ...........................114
Filler Location Fuel ........................315
Filters
Air Cleaner ...........................575
Air Conditioning .......................405
Automatic Transmission ..................595
Engine Oil ............................575
Engine Oil Disposal .....................574
Flashers
Hazard Warning ........................527
Turn Signal ............................114
Flash-To-Pass ............................243
Flooded Engine Starting ....................415
Floor Console ............................293
Fluid, Brake .............................619
Fluid Capacities ..........................615
Fluid Leaks .............................114
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission ..................594
Fluids .................................616
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts ...........616
Fog Lights ..............................241
Folding Rear Seat .........................232
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .....................555
Fuel...................................500
Adding ..............................505
Additives .............................503
Capacity .............................615
Clean Air .............................501
Ethanol ..............................501
646 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) .....................505
Filler Door (Gas Cap) ....................315
Gasoline ..............................500
Gauge ...............................314
Light ................................316
Materials Added ........................503
Methanol .............................501
Octane Rating ..........................500
Requirements ..........................500
Specifications ..........................616
Tank Capacity ..........................615
Fueling ................................505
Fuel System Caution .......................507
Fuses ..................................602
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) ............275
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...................505
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................501
Gasoline (Fuel) ...........................500
Gasoline, Reformulated .....................501
Gauges
Coolant Temperature .....................310
Fuel .................................314
Speedometer ..........................314
Tachometer ............................308
Gear Ranges .............................418
Gear Select Lever Override ..................556
General Information .......................166
Glass Cleaning ...........................600
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...................511
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating..................508
GVWR .................................508
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect®) ...............135
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water .........................446
Hazard Warning Flasher ....................527
10
INDEX 647
Information Provided by:
Headlights
Automatic ............................237
Cleaning .............................600
Delay ................................238
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch .........243
Lights On Reminder .....................240
On With Wipers ........................238
Passing ..............................243
Switch ...............................236
Time Delay ............................238
Head Restraints ..........................230
Heated Mirrors ...........................124
Heater .................................390
Heater, Engine Block .......................416
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .243
Hill Start Assist...........................458
Hitches
Trailer Towing .........................513
Holder, Coin.............................293
HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) ............275
Ignition
Key..................................12
Illuminated Entry ..........................23
Courtesy Lights .........................23
Front Courtesy Overhead Console ............23
Illuminated Entry ........................23
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter .......23
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ....................17
Information Center, Vehicle ..................321
Inside Rearview Mirror .....................121
Instrument Cluster ........................305
Instrument Panel and Controls ................304
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ...............601
Interior Appearance Care....................599
Interior Lights ...........................244
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers).............247
Introduction ..............................4
648 INDEX
Information Provided by:
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio ...............175
Jacking Instructions........................543
Jack Location ............................540
Jack Operation ...........................539
Jump Starting ............................551
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm .........................20
Keyless Entry ...........................38
Lock The Doors .........................25
Panic Alarm ............................22
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........27
Programming Additional Transmitters .........27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................23
Unlatch The Trunk .......................26
Unlock The Doors .......................25
Key-In Reminder ..........................16
Keyless Enter-N-Go........................412
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Enter The Trunk .........................26
KeyFob...............................38
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ .....................38
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors ..................25
Passive Entry ...........................38
Passive Entry Programming .................38
Remote Control .........................38
Unlock From The Driver’s Side ..............25
Unlock From The Passenger Side .............25
Keyless Entry System .......................23
Keyless Go...............................13
Key, Programming .........................19
Key, Replacement ..........................18
Keys ...................................12
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................17
Lane Change and Turn Signals ................242
10
INDEX 649
Information Provided by:
Lane Change Assist........................243
Lap/Shoulder Belts.........................52
Latches ................................114
Lead Free Gasoline ........................500
Leaks, Fluid .............................114
Life of Tires .............................486
Light Bulbs..............................114
Lights .................................114
Airbag ................................84
Alarm ...............................315
Anti-Lock .............................318
Automatic Headlights ....................237
Brake Warning .........................312
Bulb Replacement .......................611
Cruise ...............................320
Daytime Running .......................240
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .................242
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator .....464
Exterior ..............................114
Fog .................................241
Hazard Warning Flasher ..................527
Headlights ............................236
Headlights On Reminder ..................240
Headlights On With Wipers ................238
Headlight Switch .......................236
High Beam ............................243
High Beam Indicator .....................312
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...............243
Illuminated Entry ........................23
Instrument Cluster ......................236
Intensity Control ........................244
Interior ..............................244
License ..............................613
Lights On Reminder .....................240
Low Fuel .............................316
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) .........318
Oil Pressure ...........................317
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) ...........246
650 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Passing ..............................243
Reading ..............................243
Seat Belt Reminder ......................312
Security Alarm .........................315
Service ...............................611
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .318
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ............308
Traction Control ........................464
Turn Signal ............................114
Vanity Mirror ..........................125
Voltage ..............................317
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) ......308
Loading Vehicle ..........................508
Capacities ............................509
Tires ................................471
Locks ..................................34
Automatic Door .........................36
Auto Unlock ...........................36
Child Protection .........................37
Door .................................34
Power Door ............................35
Lubrication, Body .........................580
Lug Nuts ...............................528
Maintenance Free Battery....................576
Maintenance Procedures ....................571
Maintenance Schedule ......................622
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).......318
Manual, Service ..........................636
Manual Transmission ......................417
Fluid Level Check .......................595
Frequency of Fluid Change ................595
Lubricant Selection ......................595
Shift Speeds ...........................418
Master Cylinder (Brakes) ....................591
Methanol ...............................501
Mini-Trip Computer .......................326
Mirrors ................................121
10
INDEX 651
Information Provided by:
Automatic Dimming .....................122
Electric Powered ........................124
Electric Remote .........................124
Exterior Folding ........................123
Heated ...............................124
Outside ..............................122
Rearview .............................121
Vanity ...............................125
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle ...............7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ................491
MOPAR® Parts...........................570
MTBE/ETBE ............................501
Multi-Function Control Lever.................242
New Vehicle Break-In Period .................109
Occupant Restraints ........................49
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ................500
Odometer...............................316
Oil Change Indicator .......................330
Oil Change Indicator, Reset ..................330
Oil, Engine ..............................572
Capacity .............................615
Change Interval ........................573
Checking .............................572
Disposal ..............................574
Filter ................................575
Filter Disposal .........................574
Materials Added to ......................574
Recommendation .......................573
Viscosity .............................573
Oil Filter, Selection ........................575
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................568
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink®) ............275
Operating Precautions ......................568
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) .............4
Outside Rearview Mirrors ...................122
Overhead Console.........................273
652 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Overheating, Engine .......................310
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) .............4
Paint Care ..............................595
Panic Alarm ..............................22
Parking Brake............................448
Parking On Hill ..........................448
ParkSense® System, Rear....................258
Passing Light ............................243
Pets ...................................109
Phone, Cellular ...........................135
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect®) ...............135
Phone (Pairing)...........................174
Phone (Uconnect®) ........................167
Placard, Tire and Loading Information ..........472
Power
Brakes ...............................450
Deck Lid Release ........................47
Door Locks ............................35
Mirrors ..............................124
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ...........287
Sunroof ..............................284
Windows ..............................43
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts ................59
Preparation for Jacking .....................542
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ..............................59
Radial Ply Tires ..........................479
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ...........588
Radio Operation ..........................389
Rain Sensitive Wiper System .................249
Rear Camera ............................271
Rear Cupholder ..........................291
Rear ParkSense System .....................258
Rear Seat, Folding .........................232
Rear Window Defroster .....................298
Rear Window Features .....................298
10
INDEX 653
Information Provided by:
Recorder, Event Data .......................87
Recreational Towing .......................523
Reformulated Gasoline .....................501
Refrigerant ..............................578
Reminder, Lights On .......................240
Reminder, Seat Belt.........................51
Remote Control
Starting System .........................30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm .........................20
FCC General Information ..................30
Keyless Enter-N-Go™™ ...................38
Lock The Doors .........................25
Panic Alarm ............................22
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...........27
Programming Additional Transmitters .........27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) ................23
Unlatch The Trunk .......................26
Unlock The Doors .......................25
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls .........387
Remote Starting
Enter Remote Start Mode ..................32
Exit Remote Start Mode ...................33
How To Use Remote Start ..................31
Remote Starting System ...................30
Remote Starting System......................30
Remote Trunk Release.......................47
Replacement Bulbs ........................609
Replacement Keys .........................18
Replacement Parts.........................570
Replacement Tires .........................487
Reporting Safety Defects ....................635
Restraint, Head...........................230
Restraints, Child...........................88
Restraints, Occupant ........................49
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck .................555
Rotation, Tires ...........................490
654 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle..................112
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................114
Safety Defects, Reporting ....................635
Safety, Exhaust Gas ........................111
Safety Information, Tire .....................465
Safety Tips ..............................110
Schedule, Maintenance .....................622
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage ......57
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ...........60
Energy Management Feature ................60
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ................55
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................52
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ...............57
Pregnant Women ........................59
Seat Belt Extender .......................58
Seat Belt Pretensioner .....................59
Seat Belt Reminder .......................51
Seat Belt System .........................49
Seat Belt Maintenance ......................601
Seat Belt Reminder .........................51
Seat Belts ................................51
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...................57
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage .........57
Child Restraint ..........................88
Extender ..............................58
Front Seat .............................51
Inspection ............................112
Operating Instructions ....................55
Pregnant Women ........................59
Pretensioners ...........................59
Rear Seat ..............................52
Untwisting Procedure .....................57
Seats ..................................223
Adjustment ...........................223
Rear Folding ..........................232
Seatback Release ........................227
Tilting ...............................227
10
INDEX 655
Information Provided by:
Security Alarm
Arm The System ........................20
Rearming The System .....................20
Security Alarm ..........................20
Tamper Alert ...........................22
Selection of Oil ...........................573
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information ..................19
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ....................17
Sentry Key Programming ....................19
Sentry Key Replacement .....................18
Service Assistance .........................631
Service Contract ..........................633
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .318
Service Manuals ..........................636
Setting the Clock..........................367
Shifting
Manual Transmission ....................417
Shift Lever Override .......................556
Short Message Service (SMS) .................164
Shoulder Belts ............................52
Side View Mirror Adjustment.................122
Signals, Turn.............................114
Snow Chains (Tire Chains)...................488
Snow Tires ..............................481
Spare Tire...............................483
Spark Plugs .............................616
Specifications
Oil..................................573
Speed Control (Cruise Control)................253
Speedometer.............................314
Starting .................................30
Automatic Transmission ..................412
Engine Fails to Start .....................415
Manual Transmission .....................411
Remote ...............................30
Starting Procedures ........................411
656 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Steering
Column Controls .......................242
Column Lock ..........................251
Tilt Column ...........................251
Wheel, Heated .........................252
Wheel, Tilt ............................251
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ...............387
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .387
Storage ................................609
Storage, Vehicle...........................404
Stuck, Freeing............................555
Sunglasses Storage ........................274
Sun Roof ...............................284
Sun Visor Extension .......................125
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag ..........63
Sway Control, Trailer.......................457
System, Remote Starting .....................30
Tachometer..............................308
Telescoping Steering Column .................251
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........402
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant ............310
Text Messaging ...........................164
Tilt Steering Column .......................251
Time Delay, Headlight ......................238
Tire and Loading Information Placard...........471
Tire Markings ............................465
Tire Rotation.............................576
Tires ..................................114
Aging (Life of Tires) .....................486
Air Pressure ...........................476
Chains ...............................488
Changing .............................539
Compact Spare .........................483
General Information .....................476
High Speed ...........................479
Inflation Pressures .......................478
Jacking ...............................539
10
INDEX 657
Information Provided by:
Life of Tires ...........................486
Load Capacity .........................471
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) ............491
Pressure Warning Light ...................308
Quality Grading ........................637
Radial ...............................479
Replacement ...........................487
Rotation ..............................490
Safety ...............................465
Sizes ................................466
Snow Tires ............................481
Spare Tire .............................540
Spinning .............................485
Tread Wear Indicators ....................485
Tire Safety Information .....................465
Tire Service Kit ...........................530
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ................515
To Open Hood ...........................234
Towing ................................510
24-Hour Towing Assistance ................150
Disabled Vehicle ........................559
Guide ...............................514
Recreational ...........................523
Weight ...............................514
Towing Assistance.........................150
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome ...........523
Traction ................................445
Traction Control ..........................456
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ..................457
Trailer Towing ...........................510
Cooling System Tips .....................522
Hitches ..............................513
Minimum Requirements ..................516
Trailer and Tongue Weight .................515
Wiring ...............................520
Trailer Towing Guide.......................514
Trailer Weight ............................514
658 INDEX
Information Provided by:
Transmission
Automatic ............................421
Filter ................................595
Fluid ................................619
Maintenance ...........................593
Manual ..............................417
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .27
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®). . . .275
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .27
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) .........23
Transporting Pets .........................109
Tread Wear Indicators ......................485
Trip Odometer ...........................316
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) .......................47
Trunk Release, Emergency ....................48
Trunk Release Remote Control .................47
Turn Signals .............................242
UCI Connector ...........................380
Uconnect®
Advanced Phone Connectivity ..............153
Operation .............................170
Phone Call Features .....................182
Phone Features .........................148
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect® Phone .......................192
Uconnect® Settings .......................25
Uconnect® Settings ......................351
Uconnect® 130 With Satellite Radio
Playing MP3 Files .......................374
Uconnect® (Hands-Free Phone) ...............135
Uconnect® Phone .........................167
Uconnect® Settings.........................25
Uconnect® Voice Command ..................211
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .................637
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .380
Universal Transmitter ......................275
Unleaded Gasoline ........................500
10
INDEX 659
Information Provided by:
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................57
Vanity Mirrors ...........................125
Vehicle Certification Label ...................508
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............6
Vehicle Loading ..........................473
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...............7
Vehicle Storage ...........................404
Voice Command ..........................211
Commands ............................207
Voice Recognition System (VR)................205
Warning Flasher, Hazard ....................527
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .308
Warnings and Cautions.......................6
Warranty Information ......................634
Washer
Adding Fluid ..........................581
Washers, Windshield .......................248
Washing Vehicle ..........................596
Water
Driving Through ........................446
Wheel and Wheel Trim .....................597
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care .................597
Wind Buffeting............................47
Window Fogging .........................404
Windows ................................43
Auto Down ............................44
Power ................................43
Reset Auto-Up ..........................45
Wind Buffeting ..........................47
Windshield Defroster.......................112
Windshield Washers .......................246
Windshield Wiper Blades....................581
Windshield Wipers ........................246
Wiper Blade Replacement ...................581
Wipers, Intermittent .......................247
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ......................249
660 INDEX
Information Provided by:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained person-
nel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interfer-
ence between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Information Provided by:
Grand Caravan
Chrysler Group LLC
OWNER’S MANUAL
2015
2015 Grand Caravan
15Y532-126-AA First Edition Printed in U.S.A.
Information Provided by:
15PFD41-126-AB
Printed in U.S.A
Second Edition

Navigation menu